TRAINING SERVICES CATALOG
INSTRUCTOR-LED AND SELF-PACED TRAINING FORALLEN-BRADLEY, ROCKWELL SOFTWARE, RELIANCE ELECTRIC AND GENERAL INDUSTRIAL PRODUCTS AND TECHNOLOGIES
Courses Descriptions and Requirements
Curriculum Maps
Certification and Assessment Services
Enrollment Information
Don’t Delay Getting the Training You Need. Enroll Now!
Our Training Voucher Account maximizes yourtraining budget by allowing you to prepurchasevouchers for Rockwell Automation training courses and products at a discounted cost (up to 20%).You can redeem the vouchers at the time thatbest meets the individual needs and scheduleof each employee.
The vouchers can be redeemed at any time withinone year for Instructor-led courses, Self-paced training, Job Aids, and Workstations. A convenientonline account management tool and monthly statement help you track your voucher usage.
TRAINING SERVICES
Call 440-646-3434(Option 4)
E-mail training requests to: [email protected]
To view course schedules, go to:wwwwww..rroocckkwweellllaauuttoommaattiioonn..ccoomm//sseerrvviicceess//ttrraaiinniinngg//sscchheedduulleess..hhttmmll
Maximize Your Training Investment with a Voucher AccountDo you have diverse employee development needs but a limited training budget?
For more information, go to:www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training/savingsprogram.html or contact your local Allen-Bradley Distributor or Rockwell Automation Sales office.
Introduction – Maximize Your Job and Asset Performance
Instructor-Led Courses
ControlLogix/RSLogix 5000
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
Safety
Networks
Visualization
Motion Control
Drives
Process Control
Condition Monitoring
Software Courses
Classic Courses
General Industrial Courses
Computer-Based Training
Web-Based Training
Workstations
Self-Paced e-Learning Courses
Job Aids
Savings Program
Certification Program
Assessment Services
Enrollment and Registration
Index
Table of Contents
2
5
5
23
15
29
37
47
57
65
79
87
97
103
105
121
133
145
121
161
167
169
173
177
180
1
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training2
Your Job and Asset Performance
To improve your job performance, and the performance of your automation assets, you need tosuccessfully obtain the right technical knowledgeand apply it when required - from installing newequipment to maintaining an existing system.However, traditional subject-based training approaches, which often consist of randomly selected lecture-only courses, can often fall short in helping you reach your objectives.
Rockwell Automation Training Services are different.Our systematic, performance-based, training methodology gives you the right combination of traditional instruction, hands-on practice, and refresher exercises to maximize your subject matterretention and successfully utilize that knowledge dayafter day. Through our performance-based TrainingServices, you will receive:• CCuurrrriiccuulluumm MMaappss — recommended
training paths based on your job responsibilities within a technology area
• IInnssttrruuccttiioonn ffrroomm EExxppeerriieenncceedd PPrrooffeessssiioonnaallss — subject-matter expertise on Rockwell Automation and related equipment and technologies
MAXIMIZE
• CCoommpprreehheennssiivvee CCoouurrssee MMaatteerriiaallss — award-winning materials for your classroom use and ongoing review
• PPrree-- aanndd PPoosstt--TTeessttiinngg — quantify your knowledge transfer and return on investment
• SSeellff--ppaacceedd TTrraaiinniinngg TToooollss — refresh your classroom experience with computerand web-based learning
• WWoorrkkssttaattiioonnss — practice what you’ve learned in a simulated environment before applying it on the job
• JJoobb AAiiddss — quickly reference pratical, easy-to-use procedural and troubleshooting information for a wide variety of automation equipment and technologies
• CCoonnttiinnuuiinngg EEdduuccaattiioonn CCrreeddiittss ((CCEEUUss)) ffoorr YYoouurr PPrrooffeessssiioonnaall DDeevveellooppmmeenntt — Rockwell Automation is authorized by the International Association for Continuing Education and Training and you can earn CEU credits for your professional development when you attend many of our courses. International Association for
Continuing Education and Training
A performance-based training approach, such as that utilized by Rockwell Automation, provides more individualjob productivity improvement and overall business impactthan subject-based training alone.
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 3
Instructor-Led Training
You can obtain in-person instruction on a wide rangeof automation topics from our factory-trained instructors. Each instructor brings extensive hands-onexperience and technical expertise to the classroom,and will individually guide you through programming,designing, maintaining, and troubleshooting to helpyou optimize the performance of your automationassets and meet your goals.
Standard Open Enrollment CoursesYou can choose from over 250 open enrollment classes designed around the use of automation technologies by job function. General industrial courses are also available, including Basics ofElectricity, Safety Compliance, Applied Hydraulics, aswell as Rockwell Automation technologies. Classes areconducted at Rockwell Automation and partner locations.
Tailored Training Courses Developed in a modular format, Tailored Trainingallows you to select from 1600 specific lessons in ourstandard courses to build the class content that willmeet your specific needs.
Custom CoursesWhen Standard and Tailored Training courses won’tmeet your needs, Rockwell Automation can developcustom curricula to your exact specifications. Customcourses include content specific to your automationenvironment and can be delivered using your automation equipment, software, and system configuration. This highly effective training solution isoften required for your critical plant areas orapplications.
On-Site and Private Training CoursesAny Instructor-led course can be conducted at yourplant or private location, eliminating the time andcost to travel. On-Site courses also offer the exclusivebenefit of free pre-and post-tests, which benchmarkstudents’ knowledge before and after training. Thedata captured from the tests enables you to quantifythe return on your training investment.
Embedded InstructorsIf you have a large production environment withongoing and diverse professional development needs,you may benefit from an embedded RockwellAutomation instructor to meet your continuous training needs. Embedded instructors can deliverstandard, tailored, and custom courses.
Our exclusive technology-based CurriculumMaps help you select the right Instructor-ledand Self-paced training to obtain, practice,and refresh the automation skills andknowledge you need to maximize your success on the job.
Self-Paced Training
An ideal solution for busy professionals, our self-paced, self-directed training courses and productswill help you acquire and retain new skills at yourown pace and location.
Computer-Based TrainingYou can obtain hands-on trainingon a variety of Rockwell Automation products andautomation related topics through our Computer-basedTraining courses on CD-ROM. Our computer-basedtraining provides engaging interactive exercises andsimulations to enhance your learning experience -right at your desk. Post-tests measure your knowledgetransfer after completion of each course.
Web-Based TrainingWith Rockwell Automation Web-based Training, you can utilizethe power and flexibility of theInternet to obtain on-demand training courses at your convenience.
Job AidsYou can quickly obtainessential job task information to minimizeautomation-related problems with Rockwell Automation job aids. Theseguides are published in a compact format and include an extensive selection of Procedures Guides,Troubleshooting Guides, and Reference Guides covering a diverse range of technologies and job functions.
WorkstationsTraining workstations are the ideal tool to reinforceand practice maintenance,troubleshooting, and programming skills,train new employees,and ease the transitionfrom one technology to another.Rockwell Automation workstations are available for a variety of technologies and can be customized to meet your needs.
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training4
Competency Testing
With competency testing, you will ensure your staffhas acquired the necessary automation knowledgeand skills to perform required tasks. You can selectfrom standard or custom evaluation solutions in printor electronic formats.
Integrated Performance Assessments
Not sure what type of training solution is right foryou or your staff? An Integrated PerformanceAssessment from Rockwell Automation will providethe answer.
Integrated Performance Assessments are used to capture and analyze current job skills and providea recommended training path and related activities to improve on-the-job performance.
Rockwell Automation®
Services & Support
Rockwell Automation Training Services are onecomponent of the Rockwell Automation Services& Support portfolio. This broad portfolio canhelp you develop and implement a maintenancestrategy for your automation and related assetsthat includes the right predictive, preventive andreactive methods. The right strategy will optimizeyour asset performance and utilization to meetyour production and business goals.
For more information on Rockwell AutomationServices & Support, go towww.rockwellautomation.com/services or contactyour local Rockwell Automation sales officeor authorized Allen-Bradley distributor.
ControlLogix/RSLogix 5000
©20
06 R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n, In
c. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.7
6
Com
pute
r-Bas
ed
Trai
ning
Opt
iona
lIn
struc
tor-L
ed T
rain
ing
Und
ersta
ndM
aint
ain
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
ww
w.ro
ckw
ella
utom
atio
n.co
m/s
ervi
ces/
train
ing
Und
ersta
nd
Mai
ntai
n
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
Cont
rolL
ogix
/RSL
ogix
500
0 Cu
rric
ulum
Map
Rela
ted
e-Le
arni
ng P
rodu
cts
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 2
:Ba
sic
Ladd
er L
ogic
Prog
ram
min
g
CC
P151
2D
ays
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 2
:Ba
sic
Ladd
er L
ogic
Inte
rpre
tatio
n
CC
CL2
12
Day
s
Intr
oduc
tion
toA
utom
atio
n an
dIn
tegr
ated
Arc
hite
ctur
e
CIA
101
2D
ays
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 1
:Co
ntro
lLog
ixSy
stem
Fun
dam
enta
ls
CC
P146
2D
ays
RSTr
aine
r fo
rCo
ntro
lLog
ixFu
ndam
enta
ls
9393
-RST
CLX
(939
3-RS
TCLX
ENF)
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 3
:Co
ntro
lLog
ixM
aint
enan
ce a
ndTr
oubl
esho
otin
g
CC
P153
4D
ays
Kine
tix 6
000
Mai
nten
ance
and
Trou
bles
hoot
ing
CC
N20
02
Day
s
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 3
:Pr
ojec
t Dev
elop
men
t
CC
P143
4D
ays
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Logi
x 50
00So
ftwar
e -
Proj
ect C
onfig
urat
ion
9393
-RST
LX5K
PRJ
(939
3-RS
TLKP
RJEN
F)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Logi
x 50
00So
ftwar
e -
Offl
ine
Prog
ram
min
g
9393
-RST
LX5K
OFF
(939
3-RS
TLKO
FFEN
F)
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 4
: M
otio
n Pr
ogra
mm
ing
Usi
ng L
adde
r Lo
gic
CC
N14
23
Day
s
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 4
:St
ruct
ured
Text
/Seq
uent
ial F
unct
ion
Char
t Pro
gram
min
g
CC
P154
-LD2
Day
s
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 4
: Fu
nctio
n Bl
ock
Prog
ram
min
g
CC
P152
2D
ays
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 5
:A
dvan
ced
Mot
ion
Prog
ram
min
g
CC
N19
0-LD
2D
ays
PLC-
5 to
Cont
rolL
ogix
Tr
ansi
tioni
ng
CC
P710
2D
ays
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Logi
x 50
00So
ftwar
e -
Onl
ine
Mon
itorin
g
9393
-RST
LX5K
ON
(939
3-RS
TLKO
NEN
F)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Logi
x 50
00So
ftwar
e -
Mot
ion
RSLo
gix
5000
Softw
are
-Pr
ojec
t Con
figur
atio
n
RSLo
gix
5000
Softw
are
-O
fflin
e Pr
ogra
mm
ing
RSLo
gix
5000
So
ftwar
e -
Onl
ine
Mon
itorin
g
RSLo
gix
5000
Softw
are
- M
otio
n
9393
-RST
LX5K
MO
T(9
393-
RSTL
KMO
TEN
F)
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 4
:Ph
aseM
anag
erPr
ojec
t Des
ign
CC
P711
1D
ay
RSTr
aine
r fo
r RS
Logi
x 50
00
Softw
are
Bund
le93
93-R
STLX
5KA
LL(9
393-
RSTL
X5KA
LLEN
F)
Web
-Bas
ed T
rain
ing
– A
vaila
ble
on R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n U
nive
rsity
Onl
ine
RSTr
aine
r En
terp
rise
Editi
on
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training8
Introduction to Automation and Integrated Architecture
CIA101
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation of Integrated Architecture and automation system knowledge. Students will learn aboutand interact with a variety of automation hardware. Students will also have an opportunity to use Rockwell Automation software to perform basic system configurationtasks. While performing these tasks, students will gain an understanding of how controllers, drives, motors, networks, and HMI products function together withinIntegrated Architecture.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Establish Communications in an Integrated System• Program a Basic RSLogix 5000 Project for an Integrated System• Program with Tag-Based Addressing in an Integrated System• Understand Logix5000™ Multi-Discipline Control• Understand NetLinx-Enabled Networks• Understand the Visualization Development Environment of an Integrated System• Understand HMI Direct Tag Referencing in an Integrated System
PrerequisitesAbility to perform basic Microsoft® Windows® tasks, such as:• Use a mouse • Browse for files• Open, close, size, and move windows
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have little or no working experience with automation systems andindividuals interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation andIntegrated Architecture should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
RSLogix 5000 Level 1:ControlLogix System Fundamentals
CCP146
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course is a skill-building opportunity for students who want to develop a solid fundamental knowledge of Logix5000 systems and terminology. Students will beintroduced to Logix5000 system components and functionality and will have an opportunity to use RSLogix 5000™ software to perform basic system networking andconfiguration tasks.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Identify Logix5000 System Components• Create and Modify an RSLogix 5000 Project• Communicate with a Logix5000 Controller• Create Tags and Monitor Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
PrerequisitesAbility to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks, such as:• Use a mouse • Browse for files• Open, close, size, and move windows
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have little or no working experience with Logix5000 systems or other programmable controllers should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedLogix5000 Systems Glossary ABT-1756-TSG10
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 9
2 Days CEUs 1.4RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Interpretation
CCCL21
Course PurposeThis course is a skill-building course that provides maintainers with a basic understanding of RSLogix 5000 ladder logic instructions and terminology. This coursealso provides the resources and hands-on practice required to efficiently modify basic ladder logic instructions for a Logix5000 controller. Students will use RSLogix 5000 software to perform basic software tasks.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Apply Ladder Logic Strategies and Techniques• Document and Search Ladder Logic• Modify Timer and Counter Instructions• Modify Program Control Instructions
Prerequisites• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146)• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks, such as using a mouse,
browsing for files, opening, closing, sizing, and moving windows
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have little experience with controllers and who needto learn how to interpret ladder logic should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
PLC-5 to ControlLogix Transitioning CCP710
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course introduces students to the basic tasks involved in configuring and programming a ControlLogix® controller. Students will be introduced to the terminologyassociated with ControlLogix systems. Upon completion of this course, students with basic PLC-5® processor experience will be able to create a simple project for a ControlLogix controller.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Identify Logix5000 Platforms and Components• Communicate with a Logix5000 Controller• Create and Organize a New RSLogix 5000 Project• Organize Data• Develop a Function Block Diagram• Configure Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet™ Network
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Experience with PLC-5 processors and basic ladder logic
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to program a ControlLogix controller and are already familiarwith PLC-5 processors and basic ladder logic should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training10
RSLogix 5000 Level 3: ControlLogixMaintenance and Troubleshooting
CCP153
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis course provides students with the information and experience to efficiently interpret, troubleshoot, and recommend a course of action for a Logix5000 application in a downtime situation. Resources and hands-on practice are provided in order to interpret, isolate, and diagnose common control system hardwareproblems related to noise, power, and digital and analog I/O.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Monitor and Edit Tags• Edit Ladder Logic and Function Block Diagrams• Troubleshoot Controller Problems• Force I/O and Toggle Bits
Prerequisites• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Interpretation
course (CCCL21) or equivalent experience• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are familiar with general ladder logic and controller concepts butwho are new to the Logix5000 system should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLigix 5000 and Logix5000 Standard Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50ControlLogix Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1756-TSJ20
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Kinetix 6000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCN200
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course is intended to provide students with the skills required to diagnose common problems on a Kinetix® 6000 system. Students will practice operating and troubleshooting the system through hands-on exercises using RSLogix 5000 software. Students will also learn how to maintain and troubleshoot a multi-axis motioncontrol system. Students will practice identifying faults related to hardware and software by employing methods, such as fault code tables, system LEDs, and other status indicators. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply maintenance and troubleshooting techniques to diagnose and correct common problems on a Kinetix 6000 system.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Identify Kinetix 6000 System Components• Interpret Kinetix 6000 System LEDs and Status Indicators• Analyze Fault Codes• Interpret and Monitor Motion Instructions in an RSLogix 5000 Project• Interpret Fault Routines in a Logix5000 SERCOS Motion Control Application• Troubleshoot General Kinetix 6000 System Problems and Replace Components
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position loop systems• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146) or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot Kinetix 6000 motion controlsystems should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Motion Control Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ52
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 11
RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development
CCP143
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeGiven a functional specification for a Logix5000 application, students will be able to develop a project during the course to meet the specification requirements. Thiscourse covers tasks common to all controllers that use the Logix5000 control engine or operating system, including ControlLogix, FlexLogix™, CompactLogix™, SoftLogix™,and DriveLogix™ controllers. This course instructs students on project development tasks, including organizing a project, organizing data, and configuring modules
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Create and Organize a New Project• Enter, Edit, and Verify Ladder Logic• Communicate with a Local I/O Module• Configure a Controller to Produce and Consume Data
Prerequisites• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146) or equivalent experience• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Programming
course (CCP151) or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to develop projects for Logix5000 applications should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Standard Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
RSLogix 5000 Level 2:Basic Ladder Logic Programming
CCP151
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course provides programmers with a basic understanding of RSLogix 5000 ladder logic instructions and terminology. Resources and hands-on practice are provided to program basic ladder logic instructions for a Logix5000 controller. Students will use RSLogix 5000 software to perform basic software tasks to meetthe requirements of a given functional specification.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Apply Programming Strategies and Techniques• Program Timer and Counter Instructions• Program Program Control Instructions• Program Compare, Compute, and Math Instructions
Prerequisites• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146) or equivalent experience• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks, such as using a mouse,
browsing for files, opening, closing, sizing and moving windows
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have little controller experience, who are responsible for programming Logix5000 controllers, and who need to draft ladder logic shouldattend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Standard Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training12
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:PhaseManager Project Design
CCP711
1 Day CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis course is intended to provide students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications in accordance with the S88 state model using thePhaseManager™ feature. This course presents a tool that will help you effectively organize and structure batch applications. Students will organize an RSLogix5000 project by identifying control and equipment modules within application code. Students will separate equipment code from equipment phase code, configurestate logic to transition between equipment states, and complete a project that uses an internal sequencer to activate each of the equipment phases according to a batch procedure.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Define Equipment Phases and State Models in an RSLogix 5000 Project• Separate Equipment Code from Equipment Phase Code• Monitor and Command Phase States• Configure an Internal Sequencer Using Phase Instructions
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143)
or advanced programming experience using RSLogix 5000 software• Familiarity with sequential function chart programming language
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to apply the S88 state model to RSLogix 5000 projects forany Logix5000 controller should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Motion Programming Using Ladder Logic
CCN142
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThis course provides students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications specifically for integrated motion control functionality using ladderlogic, including both SERCOS and analog motion control technologies. Students will learn how to apply the Logix5000 architecture to a multi-axis motion controlsystem while developing programming skills that incorporate other components in a Logix5000 system, such as adding system modules, sharing tasks betweenmultiple controllers, programming ladder logic, and using digital I/O.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Configure a Logix5000 System for Motion Control Applications• Configure SERCOS Servo Axes and Analog Servo Axes• Test and Tune Axes• Program a Basic Motion Routines• Program a Fault Routine • Program an Electronic Gearing Routine• Program a Virtual Axis
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position loop systems• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143)
or equivalent experience• Experience with entering and debugging ladder logic
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to configure and program Logix5000 motion control systemsshould attend this course. In addition, only students who are already familiar withLogix5000 systems and general motion control should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedLogix5000 Motion Control Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ52RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 13
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Structured Text/Sequential Function Chart Programming
CCP154-LD
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeDuring this course, students will be able to practice programming structured text and sequential function chart routines in an RSLogix 5000 project to meet therequirements of a given specification. Building on students’ project development skills, such as creating tags and configuring I/O, this course provides the skills andknowledge to program using the structured text and sequential function chart programming languages. Students will learn how to select instructions, expressions, and constructs, and then enter these elements and more into a routine. Students will also learn how to test sequential function chart logic using forces and step throughs.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Understand Structured Text Using Various Constructs• Use Sequential Function Chart with “Non-Stored” Action Qualifiers, SFC_STOP
Structure, “Time Limited” Action Qualifiers, and “Stored”/“Reset” Action Qualifier• Understand SFR, SFP, and EOT• Examine the Logic• Test the Logic Using Force(s) and Step Through(s)
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143)
or experience with basic RSLogix 5000 projects (navigating the software, creating tags, creating routines, etc.)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to program structured text and sequential function chart routines in RSLogix 5000 projects for any Logix5000 controller should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedLogix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1756-DRG70
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Function Block Programming
CCP152
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course provides students with an understanding of RSLogix 5000 function block diagrams and terminology. Resources and hands-on practice are also providedto program a Logix5000 controller using function block diagrams. Students will perform parameter modifications to function block instructions and create anddevelop function block diagram programs and routines.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Create a Function Block Diagram• Program Logical Function Block Instructions• Program Timer and Counter Function Block Instructions• Program Analog Function Block Instructions
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Understanding of basic measurement and control theory,
including basic loop control• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course
(CCP143) or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals responsible for developing, debugging, and programming Logix5000controllers using function block diagrams should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Standard Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training14
RSLogix 5000 Level 5: Advanced Motion Programming
CCN190-LD
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course is intended to provide students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications specifically for integrated motion control functionalityusing ladder logic, including both SERCOS and analog motion control technologies. Students will learn how to apply the Logix5000 architecture to a multi-axismotion control system while developing programming skills that incorporate other components in a Logix5000 system, such as adding system modules, sharingtasks between multiple controllers, programming ladder logic, and using digital I/O.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Program Motion Using the Coordinated Move Instruction • Manually Tune Axes• Perform an Electronic Cam Function• Program Output Cam Instructions• Program Motion Event Functions• Use Structured Text• Introduction to Power Programming
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to configure and program Logix5000 motion control systemsshould attend this course. In addition, only students who are already familiar withLogix5000 systems and general motion control should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Motion Control Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ52Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1756-DRG70
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Self-paced training courses are delivered viathe web at Rockwell Automation UniversityOnline. Purchase ePasses to activate trainingfrom Rockwell Automation University Online.
No Time for Class?Learn Any Time, Any Place, and at Any Pace!
Rockwell Automation University Onlinewww.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Your benefits include:• Significant cost savings when purchasing a
20, 50, or 100 pack of ePasses • Unlimited refresher training opportunities
for one year once a course is started.You can repeat courses as many times as needed without using additional ePasses!
• Easy budgeting and purchasing with package offerings
• Easy redemption because only one ePass is needed to activate a single course
Order web-based training ePasses by calling 440-646-3434 (Option 4) or by contacting your local Allen-Bradley Distributor.
Prerequisites• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position loop systems• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Motion Programming Using
Ladder Logic course (CCN142) or equivalent experience
PLC-5/RSLogix 5
©20
06 R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n, In
c. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.17
ww
w.ro
ckw
ella
utom
atio
n.co
m/s
ervi
ces/
train
ing
16
Rela
ted
e-Le
arni
ng P
rodu
cts
PLC-
5 an
d RS
Logi
x 5
Adv
ance
dM
aint
enan
ce a
ndTr
oubl
esho
otin
g
CC
P409
4D
ays
9393
-RST
LX5
(939
3-RS
TLX5
ENF)
PLC-
5 to
Con
trol
Logi
xTr
ansi
tioni
ng
CC
P710
2D
ays
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Logi
x 5
Softw
are
PLC
Fund
amen
tals
9393
-RST
LINX
(939
3-RS
TLIN
XEN
F)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Linx
Sof
twar
e
PLC-
5 an
d RS
Logi
x 5
Adv
ance
dPr
ogra
mm
ing
CC
P411
4.5
Day
s
Com
pute
r-Bas
ed
Trai
ning
Opt
iona
lIn
struc
tor-L
ed T
rain
ing
Und
ersta
ndM
aint
ain
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
Web
-Bas
ed T
rain
ing
– A
vaila
ble
on R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n U
nive
rsity
Onl
ine
RSTr
aine
r En
terp
rise
Editi
on
Und
ersta
nd
Mai
ntai
n
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
PLC-
5/RS
Logi
x 5
Curr
icul
um M
ap
PLC-
5 an
d RS
Logi
x 5
Prog
ram
min
g
CC
P410
4D
ays
PLC-
5 an
d RS
Logi
x 5
Mai
nten
ance
and
Trou
bles
hoot
ing
CC
P412
4D
ays
PLC-
5/SL
C 50
0an
d RS
Logi
x Fu
ndam
enta
ls
CC
P122
2D
ays
SLC
500
and
PLC-
5Co
mm
unic
atio
ns
CC
PS65
1D
ay
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training18
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCP412
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis skill-building course provides students with the knowledge and the practice needed to interpret, isolate, and diagnose common hardware problems related tonoise, power, and discrete and analog I/O. In troubleshooting scenarios, students are introduced to basic ladder logic interpretation, which is applied to diagnostictasks. Students practice these diagnostic skills by tracing through ladder logic instructions in an RSLogix 5 project.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Communicate with a PLC-5 Processor• Monitor and Enter Data• Interpret Instructions• Edit Ladder Logic• Document and Search a Project• Force Inputs and Outputs• Troubleshoot Noise, Discreate and Analog I/O, I/O Channel and Chassis,
and Processor/Power Supply Problems
Prerequisites• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems• Working knowledge of programmable controllers or completion of the
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to isolate and correct problems in a 1785 PLC-5 system ormake changes to RSLogix 5 programs or hardware should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedPLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1785-TSJ22 RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide ABT-1785-TSJ53
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogixFundamentals
CCP122
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course is an introduction to programmable controller systems. Students will learn about programmable controller systems, how they work, and how they canbe used to control various processes and machines. Students will receive a thorough introduction to RSLogix 5™ or RSLogix 500™ software and learn how to inter-pret simple ladder logic.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Identify Main Processor Components and Functions• Describe the Flow of Information through a System• Navigate through RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 Software• Set Up Communications between a Programming System and a Processor• Identify PLC-5 and SLC™ 500 System Adresses• Interpret Simple Ladder Logic
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are new to PLC-5/SLC 500 systems and applications usingRSLogix software should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 19
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 ProgrammingCCP410
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis course introduces students to programming techniques and instructions to configure and program a 1785 PLC-5 system. The instructor will demonstrate how touse programming instructions and techniques to create a ladder logic project. Students will be given exercises that provide them with hands-on practice usingRSLogix 5 software to program a PLC-5 processor.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Establish Communications• Configure Channels• Identify Addresses and Organize the Data Table• Draft Ladder Logic• Program Instructions• Enter Documentation• Search Ladder Logic
Prerequisites• Experience with basic control and electrical principles• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have to write ladder logic projects for 1785 PLC-5 processorsshould attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide ABT-1785-TSJ53PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1785-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 AdvancedMaintenance and Troubleshooting
CCP409
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis course builds upon students’ knowledge of basic maintenance and troubleshooting techniques and provides the practice needed to interpret, isolate, and diagnoseproblems found in advanced PLC-5 applications. Students will interpret and modify advanced ladder logic instructions in troubleshooting scenarios. In addition, studentspractice diagnostic skills by tracing through ladder logic instructions and troubleshooting communications problems with DH+ and remote I/O networks.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Troubleshoot DH+ Communications• Troubleshoot Program Flow and Interrupt Routines• Troubleshoot Sequential Function Charts• Troubleshoot Fault, STI, and PII Routines• Troubleshoot FSC, Immediate I/O Update, Shift Register, and Sequencer Instructions• Troubleshoot Message and PID Instructions• Troubleshoot Analog Data Transfers• Troubleshoot Data Transfers between Scanner and Adapter
Prerequisites• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting course (CCP412)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting advanced PLC-5 applications using RSLogix 5 software should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedPLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1785-TSJ22 RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide ABT-1785-TSJ53 PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1785-DRG70
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training20
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Advanced Programming
CCP411
4.5 Days CEUs 3.2
Course PurposeThis course introduces students to advanced programming techniques and instructions that will assist them in configuring and programming a 1785 PLC-5 system.The instructor will demonstrate how to use advanced programming instructions and techniques to create a functional ladder logic project. Students will be givenexercises in using the RSLogix 5 software to program a PLC-5 processor.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Set Up a PLC-5 System on a DH+ Network• Plan Program Flow Strategies• Program SFCs, MCPs, and Advanced Routines• Program Various Advanced Instructions• Apply Indirect and Indexed Addressing• Transfer Data between Processors and Analog Modules• Tranfer Data between Scanner and Adapter Processors
Prerequisites• Experience with basic control and electrical principles• Completion of the PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Programming course (CCP410)
or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to write or interpret ladder logic projects using advanced programming techniques and instructions should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide ABT-1785-TSJ53 PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1785-DRG70
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
PLC-5 to ControlLogix Transitioning CCP710
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course introduces students to the basic tasks involved in configuring and programming a ControlLogix controller. Students will be introduced to the terminologyassociated with ControlLogix systems. Upon completion of this course, students with basic PLC-5 processor experience will be able to create a simple project for a ControlLogix controller.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Identify Logix5000 Platforms and Components• Communicate with a Logix5000 Controller• Create and Organize a New RSLogix 5000 Project• Organize Data• Develop a Function Block Diagram• Configure Logix5000 Controllers to Share Data over a ControlNet Network
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Experience with PLC-5 processors and basic ladder logic
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to program a ControlLogix controller and are already familiarwith PLC-5 processors and basic ladder logic should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50
Difficulty Level System-Level
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
SLC 500 and PLC-5 CommunicationsCCPS65
1 Day CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis blended-media course introduces students to the communication capabilities of RSLinx® software. This course gives students the needed skills required to configureand manage various communications options between RSLinx software and RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5 software. Using features built into RSLinx software, studentswill learn how to monitor, optimize, and diagnose industrial network communications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Configure a Data Highway Plus™ (DH+™) Communications and Serial Driver in
RSLinx Software• Navigate RSLinx Software• Download and Upload a Project• Go Online to an SLC 500 or PLC-5 Processor• Apply Diagnostic Tools and Utilities• Configure Client Application Communications
Prerequisites• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems • Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft
Windows 95 or Windows NT® environment• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course
(CCP122)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for programming or maintaining and troubleshooting SLC 500 or PLC-5 applications using RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5software should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide ABT-1785-TSJ53PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1785-DRG70SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Sign up for a free 5-day trial of our web-based training and visit Rockwell Automation University Online! Go to: www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training/webbased.html
Try Our Web-Based and Computer-Based Training for Free!
You can select from a list of computer-based course titles anddownload a demo at: www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training/demo.html
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 21
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training22
Industry Curriculum
Earn State Approved ProfessionalDevelopment Hours (PDHs) Toward Your Certification
This training curriculum will help improve yourknowledge of operating, maintaining, and troubleshooting Rockwell Automation hardware and software, as well as help you satisfy your professional development hour requirements.Because Rockwell Automation products are widelyused in the operation of water wastewater facilities,state officials approve specific Rockwell Automationinstructor-led training for professional developmenthours. This curriculum offers a unique blend ofcourses that will help increase your skills and knowledge of Rockwell Automation controllers,drives, networks, and software.
Course Length
The approved courses in this curriculum range from1 to 5 days. Professional development hours will beearned based on course length and you will alsoreceive standardized IACET CEUs.
Curriculum Benefits
This curriulum was designed with your certificationneeds in mind. Rockwell Automation understandsthat you need to earn a designated number of PDHsevery few years. In addition to becoming more efficient and effective on the job, the program offers you:
• PDH tracking in the Rockwell Automation Learning Management System
• Official student transcripts• Certificates of completion• Useful job aids and student materials • Automatic CEU and PDH conversion based on
your state requirements
WATER WASTEWATER
Registration
To request a specific course description or to registerfor any Rockwell Automation training course,contact your local Allen-Bradley Distributor orRockwell Automation Sales and Support office for acomplete listing of courses, descriptions, prices, andschedules at 440-646-3434 (Option 4). You can alsoaccess course information via the Web at: www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Approved Courses
• PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting(CCP412)
• PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Advanced Maintenance and Troubleshooting (CCP409)
• SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Maintenance and Troubleshooting(CCPS43)
• SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Advanced Maintenance andTroubleshooting (CCPS45)
• SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Programming (CCPS41)• SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Advanced Programming (CCPS42)• RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
(CCP146) • RSLogix 5000 Level 3: ControlLogix Maintenance and
Troubleshooting (CCP153) • AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals (CCA101)• PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Configuration and Startup
(CCA161)• PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Maintenance and
Troubleshooting (CCA163)• 1336 PLUS II Maintenance and Troubleshooting (CCA137)• ControlNet and RSNetWorx Maintenance and Troubleshooting
(CCP172)
• PanelView 300/550/600/900/1000/1400 andPanelBuilder32 Application Development (CCP196)
• RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Interpretation(CCCL21)
• RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Programming(CCP151)
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
SLC 500/RSLogix 500
©20
06 R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n, In
c. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.25
ww
w.ro
ckw
ella
utom
atio
n.co
m/s
ervi
ces/
train
ing
24
Com
pute
r-Bas
ed
Trai
ning
Opt
iona
lIn
struc
tor-L
ed T
rain
ing
Und
ersta
ndM
aint
ain
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
Web
-Bas
ed T
rain
ing
– A
vaila
ble
on R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n U
nive
rsity
Onl
ine
RSTr
aine
r En
terp
rise
Editi
on
Rela
ted
e-Le
arni
ng P
rodu
cts
9393
-RST
500O
NEN
E(9
393-
RST5
00O
NEN
F)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Logi
x 50
0So
ftwar
e-O
nlin
e M
onito
ring
RSLo
gix
500
Softw
are-
Offl
ine
Prog
ram
min
g
9393
-RST
500D
SEN
E(9
393-
RST5
00DS
ENF)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Logi
x 50
0So
ftwar
e-D
ocum
entin
gan
d Se
arch
ing
RSLo
gix
500
Softw
are-
Onl
ine
Mon
itorin
g
RSLo
gix
500
Softw
are-
Doc
umen
ting
and
Sear
chin
g
9393
-RSC
OM
P500
RSCo
mpa
nion
fo
r SL
C 50
0 an
dM
icro
Logi
x Pr
oces
sors
9393
-RST
LINX
(939
3-RS
TLIN
XEN
F)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Linx
Sof
twar
e
9393
-RST
SLC
(939
3-RS
TSLC
ENF)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rSL
C Fu
ndam
enta
ls
RSTr
aine
r RS
Logi
x 50
0 So
ftwar
e Bu
ndle
9393
-RST
500A
LEN
E93
93-R
ST50
0ALE
NF
9393
-RST
500O
FEN
E(9
393-
RST5
00O
FEN
F)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Logi
x 50
0So
ftwar
e-O
fflin
e Pr
ogra
mm
ing
Und
ersta
nd
Mai
ntai
n
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
SLC
500/
RSLo
gix
500
Curr
icul
um M
ap
SLC
500
and
RSLo
gix
500
Mai
nten
ance
an
d Tr
oubl
esho
otin
g
CC
PS43
4D
ays
PLC-
5/SL
C 50
0an
d RS
Logi
xFu
ndam
enta
ls
CC
P122
2D
ays
SLC
500
and
RSLo
gix
500
Adv
ance
d M
aint
enan
ce
and
Trou
bles
hoot
ing
CC
PS45
4D
ays
SLC
500
and
PLC-
5Co
mm
unic
atio
ns
CC
PS65
1D
ay
SLC
500
and
RSLo
gix
500
Adv
ance
d Pr
ogra
mm
ing
CC
PS42
4D
ays
SLC
500
and
RSLo
gix
500
Prog
ram
min
g
CC
PS41
4D
ays
Com
ing
Soon
!Co
min
gSo
on!
Com
ing
Soon
!Co
min
gSo
on!
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training26
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogixFundamentals
CCP122
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course is an introduction to programmable controller systems. Students will learn about programmable controller systems, how they work, and how they canbe used to control various processes and machines. Students will receive a thorough introduction to RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software and learn how to interpretsimple ladder logic.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Identify Main Processor Components and Functions• Describe the Flow of Information through a System• Navigate through RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 Software• Set Up Communications between a Programming System and a Processor• Identify PLC-5 and SLC 500 System Adresses• Interpret Simple Ladder Logic
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are new to PLC-5/SLC 500 systems and applications usingRSLogix software should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
SLC 500 and PLC-5 CommunicationsCCPS65
1 Day CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis blended-media course introduces students to the communication capabilities of RSLinx software. This course gives students the needed skills required to configureand manage various communications options between RSLinx software and RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5 software. Using features built into RSLinx software, studentswill learn how to monitor, optimize, and diagnose industrial network communications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Configure a Data Highway Plus (DH+) Communications and Serial Driver in
RSLinx Software• Navigate RSLinx Software• Download and Upload a Project• Go Online to an SLC 500 or PLC-5 Processor• Apply Diagnostic Tools and Utilities• Configure Client Application Communications
Prerequisites• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems • Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft
Windows 95 or Windows NT environment• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course
(CCP122)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for programming or maintaining and troubleshooting SLC 500 or PLC-5 applications using RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5software should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide ABT-1785-TSJ53PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1785-DRG70SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 27
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCPS43
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis skill-building course provides the necessary practice needed to interpret, isolate, and diagnose common hardware problems related to noise, power, and discrete and analog I/O. In troubleshooting scenarios, students are introduced to basic ladder logic interpretation, which is applied to diagnostic tasks. Students practice these diagnostic skills by tracing through ladder logic instructions in an RSLogix 500 project.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Monitor and Enter Data• Troubleshoot Processor and Power Supply Problems• Troubleshoot Discrete and Analog I/O Problems• Search Ladder Logic• Create a Histogram• Force Inputs and Outputs• Interpret Various Ladder Logic Instructions
Prerequisites• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems• Working knowledge of programmable controllers or completion of the
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Who Should AttendIIndividuals who need to troubleshoot and maintain SLC 500 systemsusing RSLogix 500 software should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52 SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1747-TSJ22SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Optional (not included)Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software 9393-EGLX500
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 AdvancedMaintenance and Troubleshooting
CCPS45
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis course provides the practice needed to interpret, isolate, and diagnose problems found in advanced SLC 500 applications. In troubleshooting scenarios, students interpret and modify advanced ladder logic instructions by operating simulation devices and HMI applications, such as PanelView™ terminals and RSView®32 software applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Troubleshoot RSLogix 500 projects containing the following:
- STI, DII, and Fault Routines- Immediate I/O Update, Shift Register, Sequencer, and PID Instructions- Remote I/O Addressing- Discrete Data Transfers on a Remote I/O Link- Block Transfers on a Remote I/O Link
Prerequisites• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft
Windows environment• Completion of the SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Maintenance and
Troubleshooting course (CCPS43)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting advanced SLC 500 applications using RSLogix 500 software should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1747-TSJ22 SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Optional (not included)Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software 9393-EGLX500
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training28
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500Advanced Programming
CCPS42
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis course provides programmers with skills to develop advanced ladder logic projects for SLC 500 systems using RSLogix 500 software. This course covers several networking options, particularly DH+ and remote I/O communications. Students will be introduced to DH+ and remote I/O communications configurations and willhave the opportunity to program advanced instructions for data transfer.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Program STI, DII, and Fault Routines• Apply Immediate I/O Update Instructions• Program Shift Register, Sequencer, and PID Instructions• Assign Remote I/O Addresses• Configure an SLC 500 System for Discrete Data Transfers and Block Transfers
on a Remote I/O Link
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Programming course (CCPS41)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to program advanced ladder logic instructions or set up andconfigure SLC 500 systems for DH+ and/or remote I/O communications shouldattend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Optional (not included)Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software 9393-EGLX500
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 ProgrammingCCPS41
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis course provides students with the resources and hands-on practice to program an SLC 500 processor. Students will create a program step-by-step to meet the requirements of a given functional specification. As each section of the program is built, students will gain experience that can be applied to more advancedRSLogix 500 projects.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Create a New Project and Draft Ladder Logic• Determine Program Flow and Create Subroutines• Select and Program Various Instructions• Test a Program• Enter and Search for Documentation• Configure and Preview a Project Report• Communicate with an SLC 500 Processor
Prerequisites• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course
(CCP122)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for programming SLC 500 applications usingRSLogix 500 software should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Optional (not included)Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software 9393-EGLX500
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Safety
©20
06 R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n, In
c. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.31
ww
w.ro
ckw
ella
utom
atio
n.co
m/s
ervi
ces/
train
ing
30
Opt
iona
lIn
struc
tor-L
ed T
rain
ing
Und
ersta
ndM
aint
ain
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
2030
Ele
ctro
Gua
rdSa
fety
Isol
atio
n Sy
stem
M
aint
enan
ce a
ndTr
oubl
esho
otin
gFu
ndam
enta
ls
SAF-
ELE1
01-LD
1D
ay
2030
Ele
ctro
Gua
rdSa
fety
Isol
atio
n Sy
stem
Aut
horiz
ed
Mai
nten
ance
and
Trou
bles
hoot
ing
SAF-
ELE1
02-LD
2D
ays
Gua
rdPL
C 16
00/1
800
Cont
rolle
r Sy
stem
sPr
ogra
mm
ing
SAF-
PLC
103
1D
ay
Und
ersta
nd
Mai
ntai
n
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
Safe
ty C
urric
ulum
Map
Gua
rdPL
C 16
00/1
800
Cont
rolle
r Sy
stem
sFu
ndam
enta
ls
SAF-
PLC
101
1D
ay
Gua
rdPL
C 16
00/1
800
Cont
rolle
r Sy
stem
sM
aint
enan
cean
d Tr
oubl
esho
otin
g
SAF-
PLC
102
1D
ay
Gua
rdLo
gix
Mai
nten
ance
and
Trou
bles
hoot
ing
SAF-
LOG
102
2D
ays
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 1
:Co
ntro
lLog
ixSy
stem
Fun
dam
enta
ls
CC
P146
2D
ays
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 3
:Pr
ojec
t Dev
elop
men
t
CC
P143
4D
ays
Gua
rdLo
gix
App
licat
ion
Dev
elop
men
t
SAF-
LOG
101
2D
ays
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training32
RSLogix 5000 Level 1:ControlLogix System Fundamentals
CCP146
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course is a skill-building opportunity for students who want to develop a solid fundamental knowledge of Logix5000 systems and terminology. Students willbe introduced to Logix5000 system components and functionality and will have an opportunity to use RSLogix 5000 software to perform basic system networkingand configuration tasks.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Identify Logix5000 System Components• Create and Modify an RSLogix 5000 Project• Communicate with a Logix5000 Controller• Create Tags and Monitor Data in an RSLogix 5000 Project
PrerequisitesAbility to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks, such as:• Use a mouse • Browse for files• Open, close, size, and move windows
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have little or no working experience with Logix5000 systems or other programmable controllers should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedLogix5000 Systems Glossary ABT-1756-TSG10
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems Fundamentals
SAF-PLC101
1 Days CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis course is a skill-building opportunity for students who want to develop a fundamental knowledge of GuardPLC™ 1600/1800 systems and RSLogix Guard PLUS software. Students will be introduced to GuardPLC safety standards, functionality and controller circuitry, controller components, and distributed I/O modules. Studentswill have hands-on opportunities to use RSLogix Guard PLUS software to establish communications with a controller. This course provides students with the resourcesand hands-on practice required to download a project to a GuardPLC 1600 controller and start a routine.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Understand the Safety Principles of a GuardPLC System• Understand the Functionality of a GuardPLC System• Identify GuardPLC 1600/1800 System Components• Get Started with RSLogix Guard PLUS Software• Configure Communications for a GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller• Download and Start the RSLogix Guard PLUS Project
Prerequisites• Experience with industrial control applications is recommended
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have no or little experience using GuardPLC 1600/1800 controllers should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix Guard PLUS and GuardPLC Procedures Guide ABT-1753-TSJ50GuardPLC Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1753-DRG70
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 33
2 Day CEUs 1.4GuardLogix Maintenance andTroubleshooting
SAF-LOG102
Course PurposeThis course provides students with the necessary resources and hands-on practice to efficiently troubleshoot a previously operational GuardLogix™ system. Students willbe introduced to GuardLogix system hardware and software components, functionality, terminology, and safety standards. Students will also gain experience interpreting safety instructions using RSLogix 5000 software. In addition, students will have hands-on opportunities to troubleshoot GuardLogix system componentsand safety CompactBlock™ I/O modules.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Identify GuardLogix Project Components• Identify GuardLogix Safety Signatures and Safety Lock/Unlock States• Identify I/O Tags in a GuardLogix System• Monitor GuardLogix Tag Values• Search and Print GuardLogix Project Components• Troubleshoot and Replace GuardLogix System Components• Troubleshoot and Replace Safety CompactBlock I/O Modules• Interpret Safety Instructions in a GuardLogix Project
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix Systems Fundamentals
course (CCP146) or equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000 software• General experience with industrial controls
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to monitor and troubleshoot RSLogix 5000 projects forGuardLogix controllers should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedGuardLogix Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-GRDLX-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
1 Day CEUs 0.7
2030 ElectroGuard Safety Isolation SystemMaintenance and TroubleshootingFundamentals
SAF-ELE101-LD
Course PurposeThis course will help provide students with the fundamental skills needed to operate, start up, maintain, and troubleshoot an ElectroGuard® Safety Isolation System.The instructor will describe and demonstrate basic system functionality and procedures for checkout, troubleshooting, and preventative maintenance. Students will thenpractice these procedures using ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System modules. Highlights of this course include working on an ElectroGuard system equipped withexpansion, communication, and pneumatic isolation modules.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Overview of ElectroGuard Modules, Including Power Panel, Control Module,
Expansion Module, Remote Lockout Station, Pneumatic Isolation Module• Perform System Checkout • Troubleshoot an ElectroGuard System• Interpret the Status Indicator Lights• Replace ElectroGuard Modules• Create a Service Log• Perform Preventative Maintenance Prerequisites• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices • Ability to perform lockout/tagout procedures • Experience using a multimeter and reading an electrical schematic • Ability to interpret an electrical schematic
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot an ElectroGuard SafetyIsolation System should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training34
1 Day CEUs 0.7GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller SystemsMaintenance and Troubleshooting
SAF-PLC102
Course PurposeThis course provides students with the necessary resources and hands-on practice to efficiently maintain an RSLogix Guard PLUS project and troubleshoot a GuardPLCcontroller. It builds upon students’ fundamental knowledge of common controller terms and operation, and students’ ability to save, compile code, and download aproject. This course adds to students’ skill sets by introducing new tasks, such as creating and connecting signals, modifying a function block program, and troubleshooting problems with the controller. Students will also learn offline and online monitoring, testing of a routine, forcing project signals, and configuring andexporting diagnostic logs for locating errors and simulating test conditions that do not occur in normal operation.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Modify and Download an RSLogix Guard PLUS Project• Configure and Export GuardPLC Diagnostic Logs• Troubleshoot GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Errors• Monitor and Test an RSLogix Guard PLUS Routine• Force an RSLogix Guard PLUS Project Signal• Archive and Restore an RSLogix Guard PLUS Project
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks, such as using a mouse and
moving windows• Completion of the GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems Fundamentals
course (SAF-PLC101)• Experience with industrial control applications
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to maintain RSLogix Guard PLUS projects and troubleshootGuardPLC controllers should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix Guard PLUS and GuardPLC Software Procedures Guide ABT-1753-TSJ50GuardPLC Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1753-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
2 Days CEUs 1.4
2030 ElectroGuard Safety Isolation SystemAuthorized Maintenance andTroubleshooting
SAF-ELE102-LD
Course PurposeThis course will help provide students with the skills and authorization level needed to maintain and troubleshoot the factory-sealed modules of a 2030 ElectroGuardSafety Isolation System. The instructor will describe and demonstrate procedures for module checkout, troubleshooting, and preventative maintenance. Highlights ofthis course include working on an ElectroGuard system equipped with expansion, communication, and pneumatic isolation modules. This course will also provide students with opportunities to practice troubleshooting module faults.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Perform Module Checkout • Break the Factory Seal of an ElectroGuard Module• Troubleshoot within the Module • Interpret Status Indicator Lights• Replace the Module Seal• Create a Service Log• Perform Preventative Maintenance• Troubleshoot an ElectroGuard System to the Component LevelPrerequisites• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices • Ability to perform lockout/tagout procedures • Experience using a multimeter • Ability to interpret an electrical schematic • Completion of the 2030 ElectroGuard Safety Isolation System Maintenance
and Troubleshooting Fundamentals course (SAF-ELE101-LD) or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot an ElectroGuard System andwho require authorization to repair sealed modules should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedSchematic Print Collection
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 35
2 Days CEUs 1.4GuardLogix Application Development
SAF-LOG101
Course PurposeThis course is a skill-building opportunity for students who want to develop knowledge of GuardLogix systems. Students will be introduced to GuardLogix system hardware and software components, functionality, terminology, and safety standards. Students will also gain experience programming safety instructions using RSLogix 5000 software. Hands-on opportunities are provided to configure CompactBlock I/O safety modules. Students will also use RSNetWorx™ for DeviceNet™
software to map CompactBlock I/O safety data. Also, students will gain experience sending safety data over an EtherNet/IP network using producer and consumertechnology. In addition, students will learn how to lock a GuardLogix controller to protect safety control components from modification.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Identify GuardLogix System Hardware Components• Create a New GuardLogix Project Using RSLogix 5000 Software• Configure CompactBlock I/O Safety Modules for a GuardLogix Project Using
RSLogix 5000 Software• Map Safety I/O Block Data Using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet Software• Program RSLogix 5000 Ladder Logic within a GuardLogix Safety Task • Configure a GuardLogix Controller to Produce and Consume Safety Data
over EtherNet/IP
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143)• General browsing and mapping experience with RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software• General experience with industrial controls
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to develop RSLogix 5000 projects for GuardLogix controllers should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedGuardLogix Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-GRDLX-DRG70
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development
CCP143
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeGiven a functional specification for a Logix5000 application, students will be able to develop a project during the course to meet the specification requirements. Thiscourse covers tasks common to all controllers that use the Logix5000 control engine or operating system, including ControlLogix, FlexLogix, CompactLogix, SoftLogix,and DriveLogix controllers. This course instructs students on project development tasks, including organizing a project, organizing data, and configuring modules.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Create and Organize a New Project• Enter, Edit, and Verify Ladder Logic• Communicate with a Local I/O Module• Configure a Controller to Produce and Consume Data
Prerequisites• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146) or equivalent experience• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Programming
course (CCP151) or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to develop projects for Logix5000 applications should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedLogix5000 Standard Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training36
1 Day CEUs 0.7GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller SystemsProgramming
SAF-PLC103
Course PurposeThis course provides students with the necessary resources and hands-on practice to effectively program an RSLogix Guard PLUS project for GuardPLC controller communications with other devices, such as an OPC server and another controller. This course adds to students’ skill set by introducing new tasks, such as creatinguser-defined function blocks, configuring a distributed I/O module, and configuring OPC and peer-to-peer communications. Students will also learn how to configureuser accounts for restricting access to windows of an RSLogix Guard PLUS project and for performing certain tasks on a GuardPLC controller.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Create an RSLogix Guard PLUS Function Block Routine• Configure a GuardPLC Distributed I/O Module• Create RSLogix Guard PLUS Project User Accounts• Configure a GuardPLC OPC Server• Configure GuardPLC Peer-to-Peer Communications
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks, such as using a mouse and
moving windows• Completion of the GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems Fundamentals
course (SAF-PLC101) • Completion of the GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems Maintenance
and Troubleshooting course (SAF-PLC102) • Experience with industrial control applications
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to program an RSLogix Guard PLUS project and configure aGuardPLC controller to communicate with other devices should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix Guard PLUS and GuardPLC Procedures Guide ABT-1753-TSJ50GuardPLC Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1753-DRG70
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Rockwell Automation On-Site Training can work in atypical classroom environment or on the plant floor.
Receive these benefits with Standard, On-SiteTraining:• FFlleexxiibbllee llooccaattiioonn - at your facility, in your training
center, on the plant floor • FFlleexxiibbllee sscchheedduullee - any date, time, or shift that
works best for your employees • FFrreeee!! pprree-- aanndd ppoosstt--tteessttss that measure your
employees’ knowledge gain and demonstrate the value of Rockwell Automation training solutions
• DDeeddiiccaatteedd iinnssttrruuccttoorr emphasizing hands-on,job-related training relevant to your employees’needs
• TTrraaiinniinngg ccoonntteenntt adjusted according to employee skill levels
• TTrraaiinniinngg ccoosstt--ssaavviinnggss - no travel expenses • SSttaannddaarrddiizzeedd ttrraaiinniinngg - employees attend the same
training and learn the same information
Bring Training to Your Organization with On-Site Training Services!
To start your on-site training program,call 440-646-3434 (Option 4) or call your local Allen-Bradley Distributor.
Networks
©20
06 R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n, In
c. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.39
ww
w.ro
ckw
ella
utom
atio
n.co
m/s
ervi
ces/
train
ing
38
Com
pute
r-Bas
ed
Trai
ning
RSTr
aine
rEn
terp
rise
Editi
on
Rela
ted
e-Le
arni
ng P
rodu
cts
SLC
500
and
PLC-
5Co
mm
unic
atio
ns
CC
PS65
1D
ay
Ethe
rNet
/IP
Mai
nten
ance
and
Trou
bles
hoot
ing
CC
P176
2D
ays
Pow
erFl
ex 7
00Ve
ctor
Con
trol
Com
mun
icat
ions
on
Dev
iceN
et
CC
A16
21
Day
9393
-RST
LINX
(939
3-RS
TLIN
XEN
F)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Linx
Sof
twar
e
Pow
erFl
ex 7
00Ve
ctor
Con
trol
Com
mun
icat
ions
on
Cont
rolN
et
CC
A16
42
Day
s
Opt
iona
lIn
struc
tor-L
ed T
rain
ing
Und
ersta
ndM
aint
ain
Prog
ram
and
D
esig
nPr
ogra
m a
nd D
esig
nan
d M
aint
ain
Und
ersta
nd
Mai
ntai
n
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
Net
wor
ks C
urric
ulum
Map
Basi
c Pr
oces
s Co
ntro
lU
sing
Sm
art
Inst
rum
enta
tion
CC
PC01
3D
ays
Intr
oduc
tion
toA
utom
atio
n an
d In
tegr
ated
Arc
hite
ctur
e
CIA
101
2D
ays
Cont
rolN
et a
ndRS
Net
Wor
xM
aint
enan
ce a
ndTr
oubl
esho
otin
g
CC
P172
2D
ays
Dev
iceN
et a
ndRS
Net
Wor
xCo
nfig
urat
ion
and
Trou
bles
hoot
ing
CC
P164
3D
ays
Cont
rolN
et a
ndRS
Net
Wor
xD
esig
n an
dCo
nfig
urat
ion
CC
P170
2D
ays
Dat
a H
ighw
ay/E
ther
net
Peer
-to-P
eer
Com
mun
icat
ions
CC
P310
-LD4.
5 D
ays
Ethe
rNet
/IP
Des
ign
and
Conf
igur
atio
n
CC
P174
2D
ays
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training40
Introduction to Automation and Integrated Architecture
CIA101
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation of Integrated Architecture and automation system knowledge. Students will learn aboutand interact with a variety of automation hardware. Students will also have an opportunity to use Rockwell Automation software to perform basic system configurationtasks. While performing these tasks, students will gain an understanding of how controllers, drives, motors, networks, and HMI products function together withinIntegrated Architecture.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Establish Communications in an Integrated System• Program a Basic RSLogix 5000 Project for an Integrated System• Program with Tag-Based Addressing in an Integrated System• Understand Logix5000 Multi-Discipline Control• Understand NetLinx-Enabled Networks• Understand the Visualization Development Environment of an Integrated System• Understand HMI Direct Tag Referencing in an Integrated System
PrerequisitesAbility to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks, such as:• Use a mouse • Browse for files• Open, close, size, and move windows
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have little or no working experience with automation systems andindividuals interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation andIntegrated Architecture should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Basic Process Control Using SmartInstrumentation
CCPC01
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThis skill and knowledge building course provides students with the fundamentals of basic measurement technology used in a process control environment. Industryexperts from Endress+Hauser and Rockwell Automation will introduce students to the benefits of using open protocols with basic measurement technologies, such aslevel, flow, temperature, pressure, and analytical devices. A series of hands-on exercises will provide students with a basic understanding of Rockwell Automationsolutions that will help connect Smart instrument networks to a Rockwell Automation system.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Common Protocols Overview• Understand HART® Communications• Configure and Calibrate HART Smart Instruments Using Hand-Held Configurators
and FieldCare Software• Apply HART Smart Instrument Networks to Rockwell Automation Systems• Configure and Calibrate Smart Instruments Using RSFieldbus™ Software• Apply FOUNDATION™ Fieldbus Smart Instrument Networks to
Rockwell Automation Systems
Prerequisites• The ability to preform basic Microsoft Windows tasks • Basic understanding of process instruments, RSLogix 5000 Programming
experience, and function block programming experience are helpful but not required
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have little or no working experience with Smart instrumentation,HART technologies, or FOUNDATION Fieldbus should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 41
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCP172
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeHands-on practice is an integral part of learning and this course offers hands-on opportunities to effectively troubleshoot ControlNet hardware and software. Studentswill be introduced to a logical process for troubleshooting ControlNet components and identifying problems with communications cards, cabling, and other networkhardware. Using network software and a workstation containing real and simulated hardware components, students will practice isolating network malfunctions, reading diagnostics, and correcting configuration errors. This experience can then be directly applied to students’ ControlNet applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Troubleshoot a ControlNet Media System• Isolate Faulty ControlNet Media Using Signal Measuring Equipment• Identify Network Malfunctions• Connect to a ControlNet Network Using RSLinx Software• Troubleshoot Using RSNetWorx for ControlNet Software• Troubleshoot a Scheduled ControlNet Data Connection for Logix 5000 Controllers• Troubleshoot a Scheduled ControlNet Data Connection for PLC-5 Processors
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Experience using programming software (RSLogix 5, 500, or 5000) is
helpful but not required
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for maintaining an existing ControlNet networkshould attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide ABT-N200-TSJ50 ControlNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide ABT-N200-TSJ20ControlNet Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-N200-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
SLC 500 and PLC-5 CommunicationsCCPS65
1 Day CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis blended-media course introduces students to the communication capabilities of RSLinx software. This course gives students the needed skills required to configure and manage various communications options between RSLinx software and RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5 software. Using features built into RSLinx software,students will learn how to monitor, optimize, and diagnose industrial network communications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Configure a Data Highway Plus (DH+) Communications and Serial Driver in
RSLinx Software• Navigate RSLinx Software• Download and Upload a Project• Go Online to an SLC 500 or PLC-5 Processor• Apply Diagnostic Tools and Utilities• Configure Client Application Communications
Prerequisites• Experience maintaining electrically controlled systems • Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft
Windows 95 or Windows NT environment• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for programming or maintaining and troubleshooting SLC 500 or PLC-5 applications using RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5software should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide ABT-1785-TSJ53PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1785-DRG70SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training42
3 Days CEUs 2.1
DeviceNet and RSNetWorxConfiguration and Troubleshooting
CCP164
Course PurposeThis course prepares students to successfully design and configure an efficient DeviceNet network using components for either a ControlLogix or SLC 500 platform. To meet thisobjective, students begin by designing a cable system, and then configure a driver, a scanner module, and network devices. This course also prepares students to troubleshoot amalfunctioning DeviceNet network and return it to normal operation with minimum downtime. Students will first verify proper network installation and then perform both hardware and software-based tasks used to isolate DeviceNet problems. Students will also practice the tasks necessary to add and replace network devices.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Design a DeviceNet Cable System• Create a DeviceNet Network Configuration• Commission Nodes on a DeviceNet Network• Configure a DeviceNet Scanner Module• Map Inputs and Outputs on a DeviceNet Network• Communicate on a DeviceNet Network Using Explicit Messaging• Troubleshoot a Network Using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet Software• Troubleshoot a Network Using Hardware Indicators • Troubleshoot a Network Using RSLogix 500 or RSLogix 5000 Software
Prerequisites:• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146) or equivalent ladder logic experience, or• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
or equivalent ladder logic experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals responsible for designing and configuring a new DeviceNet networkshould attend this course. Individuals responsible for isolating and correctingproblems or performing basic maintenance on a DeviceNet network should alsoattend this course.
Job Aids IncludedDeviceNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide ABT-N100-TSJ20DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide ABT-N100-TSJ50DeviceNet Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-N100-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
EtherNet/IP Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCP176
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course prepares students to successfully maintain and troubleshoot an efficient EtherNet/IP network by maintaining connectivity to the network. The course focuseson using a variety of software packages to ensure that the Logix5000 controllers and EtherNet/IP devices on the EtherNet/IP network maintain communications to sustain optimal performance. Students will also use web-based technologies embedded within multiple EtherNet/IP devices to monitor the health and status of anEtherNet/IP network, which is used as the communications link between a Logix5000 controller and the local and remote digital and analog devices it controls.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Identify an EtherNet/IP Communications Network• Troubleshoot and Modify Ethernet IP Addresses Using BOOTP-DHCP Server Software• Troubleshoot and Modify Ethernet IP Addresses Using RSLinx Software• Troubleshoot EtherNet/IP Device Configurations in an RSLogix 5000 Project• Troubleshoot an EtherNet/IP Network’s Media Components• Monitor an EtherNet/IP Network Using Web-Enabled Technologies
Prerequisites• RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Interpretation course (CCCL21) or
equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000 software• RSLogix 5000 Level 3: ControlLogix Maintenance and Troubleshooting course
(CCP153) or equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000 software
Who Should AttendIndividuals responsible for troubleshooting and maintaining an EtherNet/IP network should attend this course. This course is not intended for individuals whowant to design or configure an EtherNet/IP network.
Job Aids IncludedEtherNet/IP Procedures Guide ABT-N300-TSJ50 EtherNet/IP Networks Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-N300-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 43
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Design and Configuration
CCP170
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course provides students with the skills necessary to efficiently design and configure ControlNet-capable hardware and software into an effective control network.Students gain these skills from the ground up, practicing each step in the design and configuration process from choosing the correct cable to configuring the connections that will transmit data across that cable. After completing this course, students will have designed a ControlNet media system, configured ControlNethardware to behave as a deterministic and repeatable control network, and configured data connections between devices that transmit data.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Design a ControlNet Media System• Configure a ControlNet Network Offline• Go Online to a ControlNet Network• Enter Scheduled ControlNet I/O Data Connections for PLC-5 Processors• Enter ControlNet Messages for PLC-5 Processors• Enter Scheduled ControlNet I/O Data Connections for Logix 5000 Controllers• Enter ControlNet Messages for Logix 5000 Controllers
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Ability to program ladder logic using RSLogix 5, 500, or 5000 software
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for designing and configuring a new ControlNetnetwork or managing and modifying an existing ControlNet network should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide ABT-N200-TSJ50ControlNet Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-N200-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
EtherNet/IP Design and ConfigurationCCP174
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course prepares students to successfully design and configure an efficient EtherNet/IP (Industrial Protocol) network by managing both the bandwidth requirementfor a project and the number of connections on the network. The course focuses on integrating Logix5000 controllers and EtherNet/IP modules in the design and configuration of an EtherNet/IP network for optimal performance. Students will also modify Logix5000 projects to use an EtherNet/IP network as the communicationslink between a Logix5000 controller and the local and remote digital and analog devices it controls.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Design an EtherNet/IP Network• Optimize an EtherNet/IP Network• Configure and Modify Ethernet IP Addresses Using BOOTP-DHCP Server Software• Configure and Modify Ethernet IP Addresses Using RSLinx Software• Configure and Modify Ethernet IP Addresses Using RSLogix 5000 Software• Establish EtherNet/IP Connections to Remote Devices• Produce and Consume Data Over an Ethernet/IP Network• Communicate between Multiple Controllers Using a Message Instruction
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Ability to program ladder logic or completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder
Logic Programming course (CCP151)• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for designing and configuring a newEtherNet/IP network or managing and modifying an existing EtherNet/IP networkshould attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedEtherNet/IP Procedures Guide ABT-N300-TSJ50EtherNet/IP Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-N300-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training44
PowerFlex 700 Vector ControlCommunications on DeviceNet
CCA162
1 Day CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis skill-building course introduces techniques and instructions that will assist students in successfully configuring a PowerFlex 700® standard control AC drive tocommunicate on an existing DeviceNet network. Throughout the course, students will learn how to use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to perform tasks, suchas browsing the network, commissioning the PowerFlex 700 node, and configuring drive parameters. The students will also learn scanner module configuration andinput and output mapping. Students will be given an application-based exercise that offers extensive hands-on practice using the PowerFlex 700 standard controldrive and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Connect a Drive to a DeviceNet Network• Commission a Node on a DeviceNet Network• Configure Drive and Adapter Parameters Using RSNetWorx for DeviceNet Software• Manage DeviceNet EDS Files for the Drive• Configure a DeviceNet Scanner Module to Communicate with a Drive • Map Drive Inputs and Outputs on a DeviceNet Network
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the AC/ DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course
(CCA101) or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for configuring PowerFlex 700 standard controldrives to communicate on a DeviceNet network should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedPowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Procedures Guide ABT-20B-TSJ50 DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide ABT-N100-TSJ50PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-20AB-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
4.5 Days CEUs 3.2
Data Highway/Ethernet Peer-to-Peer Communications
CCP310-LD
Course PurposeThis course provides students with an overall systems approach of how Data Highway (DH), Data Highway Plus (DH+), Data Highway 485 (DH-485), and Ethernetnetworks relate to both programmable controllers and computers. General network architectures are discussed along with system interconnections, cabling, and installation. The structure of communications protocols, such as token passing, polling, and carrier-sense, multiple access, collision detection, is covered. In addition,hands-on excercises include bridge modules, gateways, routers, and 10Base-T Ethernet hubs and transceivers.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Install the DH/DH+ Cable• Checkout the Network• Plan and Interconnect Data Highway Hardware• Understand DH Message Cycles (Polling and Token Passing)• Understand DH+ Local and Remote Communications, Performance Factors,
Response Time, and Global Status Flags• Configure Ethernet TCP/IP on PLC-5/XXE• Configure Ethernet TCP/IP on Windows 95• Understand Local and Remote Ethernet to DH+ Communications• Understand Local DH-485 Communications• Understand Remote Single and Double-Hop DH-485/DH+ Communications
Prerequisites• Ability to enter ladder logic using RSLogix 5 or RSLogix 500 software
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for specifying, installing, or programming aData Highway system should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 45
PowerFlex 700 Vector ControlCommunications on ControlNet
CCA164
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis skill-building course introduces techniques and instructions that will assist students in successfully starting up a PowerFlex 700 AC drive and commissioning iton a ControlNet network. Students will learn how to configure PowerFlex 700 drive parameters and install and commission a ControlNet communications adapter.Students will also learn to configure a ControlNet network and create network connections for Logix5000 controllers.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Configure PowerFlex 700 Drive Parameters Using the LCD HIM, DriveExplorer™
Software, and DriveExecutive™ Software• Upload and Download PowerFlex 700 Drive Data• Start Up a PowerFlex 700 Drive• Install and Configure a PowerFlex 700 Drive ControlNet Communications Adapter• Configure an Offline ControlNet Network• Enter Scheduled ControlNet I/O Data Connections for Logix5000 Controllers• Enter ControlNet Messages for Logix5000 Controllers• Control PowerFlex 700 Drive Operation
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Window environment• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals responsible for configuring parameters and starting up PowerFlex 700drives should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedPowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Procedures Guide ABT-20B-TSJ50 PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-20AB-DRG70 PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Quick Reference Guide ABT-20AB-TQR90
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Make Training Choices with ConfidenceNot sure if . . . a course is the right one for you? . . . is the right technical level? . . . the content applies to your work?
The Rockwell Automation Course Selection Tool helpsyou answer these questions and make confident decisions about enrolling in Rockwell Automation training courses.
To get started, access the Course Selection Tool at:wwwwww..rroocckkwweellllaauuttoommaattiioonn//sseerrvviicceess//ttrraaiinniinngg
Then select a course to begin your assessment.All assessments are Free! and your results arekept confidential.
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training46
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 SoftwareROCKWELL AUTOMATION
Is your goal to provide the best RSLogix 5000 Softwaretraining as efficiently and cost-effectively as possible?
The RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software is an interactive series of computer-based training courses. With the RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 software series of courses, you will learn the core tasks required to effectively program and troubleshoot an RSLogix 5000 project for use withany of the Logix5000 hardware platforms, such asControlLogix, CompactLogix, FlexLogix, DriveLogixand SoftLogix.
Save 18% when you order the RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 software bundle! Get the qualitytraining you need, when and where you need it,and minimize time away from the office as well astravel costs.
Ordering Information
To order, call 440-646-3434 (Option 4) or contactyour local Allen-Bradley Distributor or RockwellAutomation Sales and Support office and use the following catalog numbers:•• RRSSTTrraaiinneerr ffoorr RRSSLLooggiixx 55000000 SSooffttwwaarree --
PPrroojjeecctt CCoonnffiigguurraattiioonn- 9393-RSTLX5KPRJ - (Standard)- 9393-RSTLKPRJENF - (Enterprise Edition)
•• RRSSTTrraaiinneerr ffoorr RRSSLLooggiixx 55000000 SSooffttwwaarree -- OOnnlliinnee MMoonniittoorriinngg- 9393-RSTLX5KON - (Standard)- 9393-RSTLKONENF - (Enterprise Edition)
•• RRSSTTrraaiinneerr ffoorr RRSSLLooggiixx 55000000 SSooffttwwaarree -- OOfffflliinnee PPrrooggrraammmmiinngg- 9393-RSTLX5KOFF - (Standard)- 9393-RSTLKOFFENF - (Enterprise Edition)
•• RRSSTTrraaiinneerr ffoorr RRSSLLooggiixx 55000000 SSooffttwwaarree -- MMoottiioonn- 9393-RSTLX5KMOT - (Standard)- 9393-RSTLKMOTENF - (Enterprise Edition)
•• RRSSTTrraaiinneerr ffoorr RRSSLLooggiixx 55000000 SSooffttwwaarree BBuunnddllee((IInncclluuddeess aallll ffoouurr ttiittlleess))- 9393-RSTLX5KALL - (Standard)- 9393-RSTLKALLENF - (Enterprise Edition)
Learn Any Time, Any Place and at Any Pace With Self-Paced Training
Save Time and Money
Because the RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 trainingseries can be used anywhere, it offers you greaterconvenience and reduced cost for training delivery.There are no travel expenses and no time away from the workplace. Your learning is self-directed,thereby allowing you to choose the content mostappropriate to your interests, job responsibilities,and skill level. RSTrainers are ideal for individualswho:• Prefer self-paced instruction• Cannot attend classroom training because
their time is limited• Need refresher RSLogix 5000 software training• Want to learn the features and capabilities of
RSLogix 5000 software• Need expertise in programming or
troubleshooting an RSLogix 5000 project
Visualization
©20
06 R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n, In
c. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.49
ww
w.ro
ckw
ella
utom
atio
n.co
m/s
ervi
ces/
train
ing
48
Web
-Bas
ed T
rain
ing
– A
vaila
ble
on R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n U
nive
rsity
Onl
ine
RSTr
aine
r En
terp
rise
Editi
onC
ompu
ter-B
ased
Tr
aini
ng
Rela
ted
e-Le
arni
ng P
rodu
cts
Fact
oryT
alk
Vie
w S
E Pr
ogra
mm
ing
(form
erly
RSV
iew
SE)
RS-R
SVSE
4.5
Day
s
9393
-RST
VMEP
T2(9
393-
RSTM
EPT2
ENF)
Fact
oryT
alk
Vie
w M
Ean
d Pa
nelV
iew
Plu
sPr
ogra
mm
ing
(form
erly
RSV
iew
ME)
CC
V204
4D
ays
RSV
iew
ME
Tips
and
Tec
hniq
ues
IVC
RSV0
001
1H
our
Fact
oryT
alk
Vie
w S
E A
rchi
tect
ure
(form
erly
RSV
iew
SE)
CC
V205
-LD2
Day
s
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Vie
w M
E So
ftwar
e-D
raw
ing
Obj
ects
RSV
iew
ME
Softw
are-
Dra
win
g O
bjec
ts
9393
-RST
VMEP
T3(9
393-
RSTM
EPT3
ENF)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Vie
w M
E So
ftwar
e-In
tera
ctiv
e O
bjec
ts
RSV
iew
ME
Softw
are-
Inte
ract
ive
Obj
ects
9393
-RST
VMEP
T1(9
393-
RSTM
EPT1
ENF)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Vie
w M
E So
ftwar
e-A
pplic
atio
ns &
Dis
play
s
RSV
iew
ME
Softw
are-
App
licat
ions
&
Dis
play
s
Fact
oryT
alk
Vie
w M
Ean
d Pa
nelV
iew
Plu
sCo
nver
sion
s(fo
rmer
ly R
SVie
w M
E)
CC
V202
1D
ay
RSTr
aine
r fo
r RS
Vie
w M
E So
ftwar
e Bu
ndle
9393
-RST
VM
EALL
(939
3-RS
TMEA
LLEN
F)
Opt
iona
lIn
struc
tor-L
ed
Trai
ning
Und
ersta
ndM
aint
ain
Prog
ram
an
d D
esig
nVi
rtual
C
lass
room
Und
ersta
nd
Mai
ntai
n
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
Vis
ualiz
atio
n Cu
rric
ulum
Map
RSV
iew
32
Proj
ect M
aint
enan
ce
CC
P200
4D
ays
Fact
oryT
alk
Vie
w S
E M
aint
enan
ce
and
Trou
bles
hoot
ing
(form
erly
RSV
iew
SE)
CC
V206
-LD2
Day
s
Intr
oduc
tion
toA
utom
atio
n an
dIn
tegr
ated
Arc
hite
ctur
e
CIA
101
2D
ays
Pane
lVie
w 3
00/5
50/
600/
900/
1000
/140
0an
d Pa
nelB
uild
er32
App
licat
ion
Deve
lopm
ent
CC
P196
2D
ays
RSV
iew
32
Proj
ect D
evel
opm
ent
RS-R
SVTR
G4.
5 D
ays
Pane
lVie
w
1000
e/12
00e/
1400
ean
d Pa
nelB
uild
er 1
400e
App
licat
ion
Deve
lopm
ent
CC
P198
2D
ays
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training50
4 Days CEUs 2.8RSView32 Project Maintenance
CCP200
Course PurposeThis course is designed to provide students with the skills needed to maintain and modify an RSView32 human-machine interface (HMI) automation project usedto control and monitor an operation. Students will use RSView32 software to practice the tasks associated with maintaining an existing RSView32 project by modifying functionality and features.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Configure Direct Driver, DDE, and OPC Communications• Modify the Tag Database and a Tag Monitor• Create and Modify Graphic Displays and Objects• Configure and Run Activity Log Files• Configure Trends, Security, and Startup Settings• Create Macros and Symbols• Configure and Run Alarms• Modify and Run Derived Tag and Parameter Files
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course
(CCP122) or the RSLogix 5000 Level l: ControlLogix System Fundamentals course (CCP146)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to maintain and modify an existing RSView32 project or need to control and monitor an operation using RSView32 software shouldattend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSView32 Procedures Guide ABT-9301-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Introduction to Automation and Integrated Architecture
CIA101
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation of Integrated Architecture and automation system knowledge. Students will also havean opportunity to use Rockwell Automation software to perform basic system configuration tasks. While performing these tasks, students will gain an understanding of how controllers, drives, motors, networks, and HMI products function together within Integrated Architecture.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Establish Communications in an Integrated System• Program a Basic RSLogix 5000 Project for an Integrated System• Program with Tag-Based Addressing in an Integrated System• Understand Logix5000 Multi-Discipline Control• Understand NetLinx-Enabled Networks• Understand the Visualization Development Environment of an Integrated System• Understand HMI Direct Tag Referencing in an Integrated System
PrerequisitesAbility to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks, such as:• Use a mouse • Browse for files• Open, close, size, and move windows
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have little or no working experience with automation systems andindividuals interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation andIntegrated Architecture should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 51
FactoryTalk View SE Maintenance and Troubleshooting (formerly RSView® SE)
CCV206-LD
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course is a maintenance and troubleshooting course that provides maintainers with a basic understanding of FactoryTalk® View Supervisory Edition (SE). Thiscourse provides the resources and hands-on practice required to understand the basic structure of a FactoryTalk View SE stand-alone or distributed application. Studentswill have an opportunity to navigate through FactoryTalk View SE software to learn to efficiently troubleshoot an application or system. Students will be introduced to topics such as system communications, data and diagnostics logging, trending, and redundancy.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Understand the Architecture of Stand-Alone and Distributed FactoryTalk
View SE Applications• Explore Communications Using Direct Referencing of OPC Topics and HMI Tags• View HMI Tags in Alarm Log Files and an Alarm Summary Object• Configure FactoryTalk Diagnostics Logging and Data Logging• Analyze Trends to Show Real-Time and Historical Data• Utilize HMI Server and Data Server Redundancy
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows 2000 or
Windows XP environment
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have little or no practical experience with FactoryTalk View SE andwho need to know how to interpret and maintain a FactoryTalk View SE application.
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
PanelView 300/550/600/900/1000/1400 and PanelBuilder32 Application Development
CCP196
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course prepares students to successfully design and configure a control panel application for a PanelView standard terminal that is used to control and monitor an operation. Students will first use PanelBuilder™32 software to practice the tasks associated with creating the operator interface screens, then they will demonstrateproper operation of the screens by interacting with the terminal and the processor.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Prepare a Standard PanelView Terminal for Operation• Create an Application, a Tag Database, and Background Text• Define Network Communication Parameters• Download an Application• Create Control Objects and Displays• Create Messages and Reports• Troubleshoot a PanelView Standard Terminal and a PowerBuilder32 Application
Prerequisites• Experience creating ladder logic using RSLogix 500 software • Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course
(CCP122)• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to create a PanelBuilder32 application, and control andmonitor an operation using a PanelView standard terminal should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedPanelView 300/550/600/900/1000/1400 and PanelBuilder32 Procedures Guide ABT-2711-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training52
RSView32 Project DevelopmentRS-RSVTRG
4.5 Days CEUs 3.2
Course PurposeThis course teaches students how to use RSView32 software to create powerful 32-bit Human Machine Interfaces (HMI) incorporating the newest Microsoft OLE/COMand ActiveX technologies. Students will learn how RSView32 software provides interoperability with other Rockwell Software products, Microsoft products, and third-party offerings. Students will create a basic HMI/MMI that incorporates the vast array of powerful tools that RSView32 software offers.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Define ODBC, OLE, COM, and DDE• Set Up Communications with a Processor Using RSLinx• Configure String Numeric Displays and Input Fields• Interact with Other Rockwell Software Programs• Create a New RSView32 Project• Attach Control to Graphic Objects• Use Symbols and Macros• Use the Event Detector and Alarm System
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Experience with industrial control applications and programmable logic
controllers is recommended but not required
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to understand the fundamental concepts of creating highlyfunctional HMI/MMI should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSView32 Procedures Guide ABT-9301-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
FactoryTalk View SE Programming(formerly RSView SE)
RS-RSVSE
4.5 Days CEUs 3.2
Course PurposeThis course will aid students in developing FactoryTalk View Supervisory Edition (SE) applications. All aspects of the FactoryTalk View SE software are presented, followed by interactive hands-on lab assignments emphasizing application of the concepts in an industrial setting. Students will have the opportunity to create an application and build graphic displays. Students will also work with RSLinx Enterprise communications software and the FactoryTalk diagnostics system.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Configure RSLinx Enterprise Drivers• Configure Direct Referencing of Data Points and OPC Browsing• Create a Stand-Alone SE Application• Use Graphic Displays and Global Objects• Program Alarms• Trend Data• Use Macros, Symbols, and Keys
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Experience with industrial control applications and programmable logic
controllers is recommended
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to develop FactoryTalk View SE stand-alone or distributedapplications should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedFactoryTalk View SE Procedures Guide ABT-9701SE-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 53
FactoryTalk View SE Architecture(formerly RSView SE)
CCV205-LD
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course will allow students to successfully deploy a finished FactoryTalk View SE distributed application. Building on students' knowledge of HMI (human-machineinterface) application development and their experience with operating these systems, this course covers Windows networking basics, FactoryTalk View SE distributed application architecture guidelines, deployment of components for a distributed application, and troubleshooting.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Create Local Users and Groups• Apply Domain/Group Policy• Create Organizational Units• Configure FactoryTalk Security• Install and Deploy a Distributed FactoryTalk View SE Application• Use Terminal Services to View Remote FactoryTalk View SE Clients• Apply FactoryTalk View SE Troubleshooting Tools and Tips
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Familiarity with Windows 2000 Server and Windows networking concepts• Completion of the FactoryTalk View SE Programming course (RS-RSVSE)
Prerequisites • Or previous experience working with FactoryTalk View SE software or similar
HMI/SCADA (Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition) products
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to move a distributed FactoryTalk View SE application froman engineering environment to the plant floor should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
PanelView 1000e/1200e/1400e andPanelBuilder 1400e Application Development
CCP198
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course provides students with hands-on experience developing graphic screen displays for PanelView enhanced terminals. Using the PanelBuilder 1400eConfiguration software in a Windows environment, students will create the operator interface screens and then download an application to thePanelView enhanced terminal.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Configure a PanelView Enhanced Terminal to Communicate Via a Remote I/O,
Data Highway Plus, or ControlNet Network• Create Controls and Displays for an Application• Create a Tag Database• Download an Application• Create Messages• Create a Report for an Application
Prerequisites• Experience creating ladder logic programs using RSLogix 5 software• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course
(CCP122)• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to be able to create and download applications to aPanelView enhanced terminal should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedPanelView 1000e/1200e/1400e and PanelBuilder 1400e Configuration Procedures Guide ABT-2711E-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training54
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView PlusProgramming (formerly RSView ME)
CCV204
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis course is a skill-building course that provides students with the skills necessary to develop FactoryTalk View Machine Edition (ME) applications that run on the next generation PanelView Plus terminals. Students will gain the hands-on skills required to prepare a PanelView Plus terminal for operation. Students will also establish communications using RSLinx Enterprise software, and use FactoryTalk ME software to create and animate graphics, configure alarms and trends, and more.Finally, students will practice downloading FactoryTalk View ME applications to a PanelView Plus terminal.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Create and Customize a FactoryTalk View ME Application• Add and Configure FactoryTalk View ME Displays• Create and Modify Tags• Create and Configure Basic Graphic Objects and Interactive Controls• Configure Security • Create Data Logs and Trends• Configure Alarms • Configure a PanelView Plus Terminal
PrerequisitesExperience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows 2000 or Windows XP environment
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to create FactoryTalk View ME applications for use on aPanelView Plus terminal should attend this course. The software skills gained inthis course can also be applied to FactoryTalk ME applications that run directlyon a Windows computer or on a VersaView® CE industrial computer.
Job Aids IncludedFactoryTalk View ME and PanelView PlusProcedures Guide ABT-2711P-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView PlusConversions (formerly RSView ME)
CCV202
1 Day CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis course is a skill-building course that provides students with the skills necessary to convert existing PanelView applications to the next generation PanelView Plus terminals. At the completion of this course, students will have the knowledge and skills required to attend other Rockwell Automation FactoryTalk View ME courses. Students will also gain skills required to prepare a PanelView Plus terminal for operation. Students will become familiar with FactoryTalk View ME and RSLinxEnterprise software as well.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Convert a PanelView Application Using FactoryTalk View ME• Configure Communication Using FactoryTalk View ME• Configure and View Diagnostics for an Application• Download a FactoryTalk View ME Application to a PanelView Plus Terminal• Update FactoryTalk View ME Displays
Prerequisites• Experience using HMI products
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to convert existing PanelView applications to FactoryTalkView ME applications for use on a PanelView Plus terminal should attend thiscourse.
Job Aids IncludedFactoryTalk View ME and PanelView PlusProcedures Guide ABT-2711P-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
55
RSView ME Tips and TechniquesIVCRSV0001
1 Hour
Course PurposeThis online, interactive, virtual classroom session is intended to provide proficient users of PanelBuilder32, PanelBuilder 1400e, or RSView32 software with helpful tipsand techniques that will get them started with RSView ME software. After completing this session, students will be able to move through the application developmentprocess in a quicker and more efficient manner.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• RSView ME Features• Development Tips• Alarming
Prerequisites• Experience using HMI products
Who Should AttendIndividuals experienced with HMI products, but new to RSView ME software,who need to familiarize themselves with the software features and functionality in a short time, should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
RSTrainer Student Manager Enterprise Edition - Tracking Made Easy for Computer-Based Training
Managing employee skills can be difficult. Formultiple users and concurrent classes, theRSTrainer Student Manager Enterprise Editionprovides a tracking and reporting utility for anynumber of courses and students.
Companies of all sizes find this network solution to be a great way to manage and usethe RSTrainer self-paced suite of courses.
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.
Select RSTrainer Student Manager EnterpriseEdition to have the flexibility to track and manage students’ onlinetraining activity from anylocation.
To download a demo, go to:www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training/demo.html
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training56
RSView Machine Edition Bundle
Software and Training Together at Last!
Combine the latest RSView Machine Edition (ME)software with our award-winning RSTrainer forRSView ME software series of courses and you havean exceptional set of tools. This bundle is designedas an all-inclusive solution to provide you with thesoftware and the training you need to be productive quickly.
Save 5% on RSView ME Bundle
Take advantage of this new bundled offering of the RSView ME Software and computer-basedRSTrainer for RSView ME Software series of courses.By ordering the software and training together,you save 5%! To order the RSView ME bundle,use part number 99770011--VVWWSSTTMMTTRRGGEENNEE.
This bundle contains the following software:
• RSView Studio for ME Software• RSTrainer for RSView ME Software -
Applications and Displays• RSTrainer for RSView ME Software -
Drawing Objects• RSTrainer for RSView ME Software -
Interactive Objects
SPECIAL OFFER
RRSSVViieeww MMEE SSooffttwwaarree KKeeyy FFeeaattuurreess• Common development environment with consistent
operator interface and navigation features across multiple platforms
• Easy-to-use configuration environment with rich graphical animation
• Reusable HMI applications across multiple machine-level projects without rework or modifications
• Compatible with PanelView Plus, VersaView® CE and VersaView terminals
• Full complement of operator devices and advanced functions
• Support of both OPC (OLE for Process Control) and ActiveX™ technologies
RRSSTTrraaiinneerr ffoorr MMEE SSooffttwwaarree KKeeyy FFeeaattuurreess• Basic principles and/or concepts of RSView ME
software• Descriptive and detailed technical explanations• Step-by-step instructions using animated sequences
and interactive simulations• Testing of skills and knowledge of the RSView ME
software• Additional reference materials including
embedded Adobe™ Acrobat PDF files of technical documentation
To order the RSView ME Bundle, call 440-646-3434(Option 4) or call your local Allen-Bradley Distributoror Rockwell Automation Sales and Support office.
Motion Control
©20
06 R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n, In
c. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.59
ww
w.ro
ckw
ella
utom
atio
n.co
m/s
ervi
ces/
train
ing
58
Com
pute
r-Bas
ed
Trai
ning
Opt
iona
lIn
struc
tor-L
ed T
rain
ing
Und
ersta
ndM
aint
ain
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
Web
-Bas
ed T
rain
ing
– A
vaila
ble
on R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n U
nive
rsity
Onl
ine
RSTr
aine
r En
terp
rise
Editi
on
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 4
: M
otio
n Pr
ogra
mm
ing
Usi
ng L
adde
r Lo
gic
CC
N14
23
Day
s
Kine
tix 6
000
Mai
nten
ance
and
Trou
bles
hoot
ing
CC
N20
02
Day
s
CNC
9/Se
ries
Mai
nten
ance
CN
N16
24.
5 D
ays
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 5
:A
dvan
ced
Mot
ion
Prog
ram
min
g
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Logi
x 50
00
Softw
are
- M
otio
n RS
Logi
x 50
00
Softw
are
- M
otio
n
CC
N19
0-LD
9393
-RST
LX5K
MO
T(9
393-
RSTL
KMO
TEN
F)
2D
ays
CNC
9/Se
ries
Prog
ram
min
g
CN
N16
14.
5 D
ays
Rela
ted
e-Le
arni
ng P
rodu
cts
Und
ersta
nd
Mai
ntai
n
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
Mot
ion
Cont
rol C
urric
ulum
Map
Intr
oduc
tion
toA
utom
atio
n an
dIn
tegr
ated
Arc
hite
ctur
e
CIA
101
2D
ays
Mot
ion
Cont
rol
Fund
amen
tals
CC
N13
02
Day
s
1394
and
G
ML
Com
man
der
Mai
nten
ance
and
Trou
bles
hoot
ing
CC
N18
34
Day
s
Ultr
a300
0 Pr
ogra
mm
ing
CC
N19
1-LD
1D
ay
1394
and
GM
L Co
mm
ande
rPr
ogra
mm
ing
CC
N18
44.
5 D
ays
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training60
Motion Control FundamentalsCCN130
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course provides students with an overview of motion control concepts, functionality, and applications. In addition, students will also learn how motion controlapplications function using the concepts and principles discussed in each lesson. An integrated practice at the end of the course provides students with an opportunityto test their complete motion control skill set. This course allows students to establish the essential foundation needed to attend other courses in the Motion Controlcurriculum.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Identify Motion Control System Components and Functions• Apply Basic Motion Control Concepts• Identify the Functionality of AC and DC Servo Motors and Servo Drives• Identify the Functionality of Feedback Devices and Software Servo Loop• Apply Motion Profiles• Apply Electronic Gearing and Camming Profiles
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course; however, a background in basic electricity, electronics, and computer concepts is helpful.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to learn basic motion control concepts for their job or as aprerequisite for attending other motion control courses should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedMotion Control Glossary ABT-M100-TSG10
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Introduction to Automation and Integrated Architecture
CIA101
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course will assist students in developing and building a solid foundation of Integrated Architecture and automation system knowledge. Students will also havean opportunity to use Rockwell Automation software to perform basic system configuration tasks. While performing these tasks, students will gain an understanding of how controllers, drives, motors, networks, and HMI products function together within Integrated Architecture.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Establish Communications in an Integrated System• Program a Basic RSLogix 5000 Project for an Integrated System• Program with Tag-Based Addressing in an Integrated System• Understand Logix5000 Multi-Discipline Control• Understand NetLinx-Enabled Networks• Understand the Visualization Development Environment of an Integrated System• Understand HMI Direct Tag Referencing in an Integrated System
PrerequisitesAbility to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks, such as:• Use a mouse • Browse for files• Open, close, size, and move windows
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have little or no working experience with automation systems andindividuals interested in gaining a broad understanding of automation andIntegrated Architecture should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 61
Kinetix 6000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCN200
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course is intended to provide students with the skills required to diagnose common problems on a Kinetix 6000 system. Students will practice operating and troubleshooting the system through hands-on exercises using RSLogix 5000 software. Students will also learn how to maintain and troubleshoot a multi-axis motioncontrol system. Students will practice identifying faults related to hardware and software by employing methods, such as fault code tables, system LEDs, and other status indicators. Upon completion of this course, students will be able to apply maintenance and troubleshooting techniques to diagnose and correct common problems on a Kinetix 6000 system.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Identify Kinetix 6000 System Components• Interpret Kinetix 6000 System LEDs and Status Indicators• Analyze Fault Codes• Interpret and Monitor Motion Instructions in an RSLogix 5000 Project• Interpret Fault Routines in a Logix5000 SERCOS Motion Control Application• Troubleshoot General Kinetix 6000 System Problems and Replace Components
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position loop systems• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals course
(CCP146) or equivalent experience with the ControlLogix platform and basic ladder logic
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot Kinetix 6000 motion controlsystems should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Motion Control Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ52
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
1394 and GML Commander Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCN183
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis course is intended to provide experienced plant maintenance personnel with the skills required to return a malfunctioning 1394 GMC system to productive servicein the shortest time possible. Students will learn how to follow a deductive, reliable, and efficient diagnostic process to correct and clear hardware fault conditions on a 1394 GMC system. This course also provides students with the necessary skills required to maintain communication interfaces between a 1394 GMC system andother devices, including remote I/O, AxisLink, and DH-485 communications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Configure Serial Communications• Download and Run a GML™ Commander Diagram• Monitor a System• Identify Global Faults• Troubleshoot the System and Axis Module• Troubleshoot a 1326 Motor• Troubleshoot EMI• Troubleshoot Remote I/O, AxisLink, and DH-485 Communications Faults
Prerequisites• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130)• Completion of the PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)
Prerequisites continued• Experience with drives, feedback devices, open/closed-loop systems,
and position, velocity, and feedback loops
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot a 1394 system with a multi-axis motion application should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedGML Commander and 1394 Procedures Guide ABT-4100-TSJ511394 and GML Commander Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1394-TSJ21
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training62
CNC 9/Series MaintenanceCNN162
4.5 Days CEUs 3.2
Course PurposeThis course instructs students on how to perform CNC™ 9/Series maintenance tasks. Students will practice interconnecting the hardware, configuring, operating, andtroubleshooting the system through hands-on lab exercises. Students will also learn how to use the control system support pages, error messages, as well as onlineand offline utilities as troubleshooting tools.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Set Up and Interconnect CNC 9/Series Hardware• Relate Fault Indications and Error Messages to Support Documentation for
Corrective Action• Perform Basic Control Operations• Select and Use Proper System Support Screens for Maintenance,
Troubleshooting and Set-Up Tasks• Use the PAL Search Monitor Function• Use Online AMP to Adjust User Parameters
Prerequisites• Familiarity with the fundamental terminology of computerized numerical control
and drive systems• Knowledge of basic electrical and electronic concepts
Prerequisites continued• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) is preferred
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to perform maintenance tasks with CNC 9/Series systemsshould attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedCNC 9/Series Quick Reference Guide ABT-8520-TQR10
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
1 Day CEUs 0.7Ultra3000 Programming
CCN191-LD
Course PurposeThis course will introduce students to Ultra™3000 digital servo drive capabilities, features, and benefits. Students will learn to understand Ultra3000 model numbersand how they relate to output power. Students will also learn the available I/O and the update times for the Ultra3000 regulators. During this course, students willlearn how to wire an Ultra3000 digital servo drive. They will also become familiar with the features and uses of Ultraware software and how it works in conjunctionwith Ultra3000 digital servo drives. In addition, students will learn how to configure an Ultra3000 digital servo drive for SERCOS activation and how to activate theSERCOS interface.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Understand Ultra3000 Specifications• Understand Ultra3000 Wiring• Use Ultraware Software• Configure an Ultra 3000 Demo • Use Analog Velocity Mode• Use Position Follower Mode• Use Indexing Mode• Understand SERCOS
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position loop systems
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to program Ultra3000 digital servo drives should attendthis course. Individuals who need to design or maintain an Ultra3000 drive system could also attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedMotion Control Glossary ABT-M100-TSG10
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 63
1394 and GML CommanderProgramming
CCN184
4.5 Days CEUs 3.2
Course PurposeThis course provides students with the skills required to successfully configure and program a 1394 GMC system using GML Commander software. Students willlearn how to use GML Commander software to configure the hardware, monitor the system, establish communication interfaces, and develop basic and advancedmotion control diagrams for a specific application.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Configure Hardware Components of a 1394 GMC System• Use GML Commander Software to Create, Test, and Tune a Motion Diagram
for a Multi-Axis System• Execute Motion Commands for a 1394 Application• Communicate to and from a 1394 GMC System Using DH-485, Remote I/O,
AxisLink, and SLC Processer Communication Networks• Program Motion• Create Electronic Camming and Gearing Routines
Prerequisites• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamental course (CCN130)• Experience in motion control applications and familiarity with drives,
feedback devices, and closed-loop systems
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to configure and program a 1394 system for a multi-axismotion application should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedGML Commander and 1394 Procedures Guide ABT-4100-TSJ51
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Motion Programming Using Ladder Logic
CCN142
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThis course is intended to provide students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications specifically for integrated motion control functionalityusing ladder logic, including both SERCOS and analog motion control technologies. Students will learn how to apply the Logix5000 architecture to a multi-axismotion control system while developing programming skills that incorporate other components in a Logix5000 system, such as adding system modules, sharingtasks between multiple controllers, programming ladder logic, and using digital I/O.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Configure a Logix5000 System for Motion Control Applications• Configure SERCOS Servo Axes• Configure Analog Servo Axes• Test and Tune Axes• Program a Basic Motion Routine• Program a Fault Routine • Program an Electronic Gearing Routine• Program a Virtual Axis
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position loop systems
Prerequisites continued• Completion of the RSLogix5000 Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143)
or equivalent experience• Experience with entering and debugging ladder logic
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to configure and program Logix5000 motion control systemsshould attend this course. In addition, only students who are already familiar withLogix5000 systems and general motion control should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedLogix5000 Motion Control Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ52RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training64
CNC 9/Series ProgrammingCNN161
4.5 Days CEUs 3.2
Course PurposeThis course is intended to provide students with extensive practice and an in-depth study of the unique programming features and software options of a CNC 9/Series system. Explanations and demonstrations of each programming function is provided along with realistic lab exercises.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Use Softkeys to Change Control Functions• Assign Access Control Levels and Passwords• Upload/Download Part Programs from the Off-Line Development System• Select and Program Type A or Type B Cutter Compensation or Tool Tip
Radius Compensation• Create Programmable Zones• Program Using Polar Coordinates and Home Codes• Create Part Program Sub Programs• Enable and Disable Program Interrupts• Create Paramacro Programs
Prerequisites• Experience as a CNC part programmer• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) is recommended
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to program CNC 9/Series systems should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedCNC 9/Series Quick Reference Guide ABT-8520-TQR10
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
RSLogix 5000 Level 5: Advanced Motion Programming
CCN190-LD
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course is intended to provide students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications specifically for integrated motion control functionalityusing ladder logic, including both SERCOS and analog motion control technologies. Students will learn how to apply the Logix5000 architecture to a multi-axismotion control system while developing programming skills that incorporate other components in a Logix5000 system, such as adding system modules, sharingtasks between multiple controllers, programming ladder logic, and using digital I/O.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Program Motion Using the Coordinated Move Instruction • Manually Tune Axes• Perform an Electronic Cam Function• Program Output Cam Instructions• Programming Motion Event Functions• Using Structured Text• Introduction to Power Programming
Prerequisites• Completion of the Motion Control Fundamentals course (CCN130) or equivalent
experience with drives, feedback devices, and velocity and position loop systems• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Motion Programming Using
Ladder Logic course (CCN142) or equivalent experience
Prerequisites continued• Experience with entering and debugging ladder logic
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to configure and program Logix5000 motion control systemsshould attend this course. In addition, only students who are already familiar withLogix5000 systems and general motion control should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Motion Control Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ52Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1756-DRG70
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Drives
©20
06 R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n, In
c. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.67
ww
w.ro
ckw
ella
utom
atio
n.co
m/s
ervi
ces/
train
ing
66
Com
pute
r-Bas
ed
Trai
ning
Opt
iona
lIn
struc
tor-L
ed T
rain
ing
Und
ersta
ndM
aint
ain
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
Web
-Bas
ed T
rain
ing
– A
vaila
ble
on R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n U
nive
rsity
Onl
ine
RSTr
aine
r En
terp
rise
Editi
on
Rela
ted
e-Le
arni
ng P
rodu
cts
1395
Driv
eM
aint
enan
ce a
ndTr
oubl
esho
otin
g
CD
D13
13
Day
s
1336
PLU
S ll
Mai
nten
ance
and
Trou
bles
hoot
ing
CC
A13
73
Day
s
1397
Driv
eM
aint
enan
ce a
ndTr
oubl
esho
otin
g
CD
D13
23
Day
s
Pow
erFl
ex 7
00Ve
ctor
Con
trol
Mai
nten
ance
and
Trou
bles
hoot
ing
CC
A16
31
Day
Pow
erFl
ex 7
00S
Phas
e ll
Mai
nten
ance
an
d Tr
oubl
esho
otin
g
PFX7
00S2
-LD3
Day
s
Pow
erFl
ex 7
00S
Phas
e l M
aint
enan
ce
and
Trou
bles
hoot
ing
PFX7
00S-
LD3
Day
s
9393
-RST
AC
D(9
393-
RSTA
CDE
NF)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rFu
ndam
enta
ls o
fA
C/D
C M
otor
s an
d D
rives
Fund
amen
tals
of
AC/
DC
Mot
ors
and
Driv
es
Pow
erFl
ex 7
00Ve
ctor
Con
trol
Conf
igur
atio
n an
dSt
artu
p
CC
A16
11
Day
Pow
erFl
ex 7
00Ve
ctor
Con
trol
Com
mun
icat
ions
on
Dev
iceN
et
CC
A16
21
Day
Pow
erFl
ex 7
00Ve
ctor
Con
trol
Com
mun
icat
ions
on
Cont
rolN
et
CC
A16
42
Day
s
Inte
lliCE
NTE
R
CC
I105
-LD3
Day
s
Und
ersta
nd
Mai
ntai
n
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
Driv
es C
urric
ulum
Map
AC/
DC
Mot
ors
and
Driv
es F
unda
men
tals
CC
A10
12
Day
s
Aut
oMax
Mai
nten
ance
and
Trou
bles
hoot
ing
RE05
204
Day
s
1336
IMPA
CTTr
oubl
esho
otin
g
CC
A13
21
Day
1336
PLU
SM
aint
enan
ce a
ndTr
oubl
esho
otin
g
CC
A12
93
Day
s
DC
Driv
es a
nd
Aut
oMax
/DCS
Intr
oduc
tion
RE05
054
Day
s
1336
IMPA
CT S
tart
up
CC
A13
31
Day
1336
IMPA
CTPr
ogra
mm
ing
CC
A13
81
Day
Aut
oMax
Prog
ram
min
gFu
ndam
enta
ls
RE05
234
Day
s
1336
IMPA
CTCo
mm
unic
atio
ns
CC
A13
51
Day
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training68
DC Drives and AutoMax/DCSIntroduction
RE0505
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis course is designed to provide students with a general understanding of DC drives and the AutoMax control system. Students will also be provided an opportunityto monitor and load an AutoMax processor. After completing this course, students will be able to identify specific hardware in the AutoMax rack, understand thefunctions of AutoMax hardware, and recognize the different AutoMax languages and variable types.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• D-C Machinery• Regulators• System Concepts• Semiconductors• SCR Power Modules• Operational Amplifiers• Drive Regulator (Generic) AutoMax• AutoMax/DCS
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to strengthen their understanding of DC drives, as well asgain introductory experience with the AutoMax/DCS system and the terminalsused for programming and monitoring should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
AC/DC Motors and Drives FundamentalsCCA101
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course is a skill-building course that provides students with a basic understanding of AC and DC motor and drive concepts and terminology. At the completion ofthis course, students will have the necessary fundamental knowledge and skills required to attend other Rockwell Automation AC and DC drives courses. In thiscourse, students will gain the hands-on skills required to build a miniature DC motor and investigate how a variable-speed drive controls the speed and direction ofan attached motor. Students will also become familiar with the drive Human Interface Module (HIM), which allows programmers, maintainers, and troubleshootersaccess to information stored within the drive.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Recognize AC/DC Motor Drive Hardware and Operation• Select a Replacement Motor• Recognize Line Protection and Filtering Device Hardware and Functions• Prevent Electrostatic Damage• Recognize AC/DC Motor Braking Methods• Test a Drive Using Electrical Measuring Tools• Preform Pre-Power and Power-On Checks• Monitor and Control a Drive Using the HIM• Select a Drive for Basic Applications
Prerequisites• General knowledge of electricity and electronics• Familiarity with electrical measuring tools is helpful but not required
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to gain a fundamental understanding of motor and driveconcepts before they learn to program, maintain, and troubleshoot AC and DCdrives should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedAC and DC Motor and Drive Glossary ABT-D100-TSG10
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 69
1395 Drive Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CDD131
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThis course will provide students with the skills needed to replace, start up, maintain, and troubleshoot a 1395 drive. Students will learn about drive replacement, pre-power and power-on checks, configuration, and troubleshooting. Students will practice procedures using a 1395 drive workstation. Highlights of this course includeworking on drives equipped with discrete and multi-communications or node adapter boards and using multiple programming interfaces, such as the 1300 programming terminal, DriveTools™, or ITS software. This course will also provide students with opportunities to practice troubleshooting drive malfunctions using adetailed troubleshooting manual.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Test a 1395 Drive System Using Electrical Measuring Tools• Recognize and Replace 1395 Drive Hardware• Modify and Monitor 1395 Drive Parameters• Configure a 1395 Drive for Start-Up• Configure a 1395 Drive Discrete Adapter Board• Verify Correct Scaling of 1395 Drive Feedback Parameters• Configure a Drive MCA Board or Node Adapter Board• Auto Tune a 1395 Drive• Troubleshoot 1395 Drive System ProblemsPrerequisites• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices• Working knowledge of PLC-5 processors
Prerequisites continued• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience• Experience using a multimeter, ammeter, and oscilloscope
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot a 1395 DC drive should attendthis course.
Job Aids IncludedDriveTools Procedures Guide ABT-D500-TSJ501395 DC Drive Installation Guide ABT-1395-TSH50
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
1397 Drive Maintenance andTroubleshooting
CDD132
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThis course provides students with the necessary information, resources, and hands-on activities for successfully maintaining and troubleshooting a 1397 DC drive.Students will be provided with the opportunity to perform hands-on exercises ranging from replacing drive hardware to isolating and recovering from drive problems.Students will also gain experience programming the drive with various programming devices, such as a HIM, a GPT, and DriveTools software, along with establishingboth remote I/O and serial communications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Test a Drive Using Electrical Measuring Tools• Identify and Replace Drive Hardware• Perform Drive Pre-Power and Power-On Checks• Modify Drive Parameters• Configure a Drive for Start-Up• Configure Drive I/O Inputs• Configure Communications • Autotune a Drive • Troubleshoot a Drive
Prerequisites• Knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices• Practical experience using electrical measuring tools (multimeter, ammeter, etc.)• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
Prerequisites continued• Basic knowledge of PLC processors• Experience using RSLogix 5 programming software
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to maintain and troubleshoot a 1397 DC drive should attend this course.
Job Aids Included1397 Drives Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1397-TSJ201397 Drive Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1397-DRG701397 Drives Quick Reference Guide ABT-1397-TQR90DriveTools Procedure Guide ABT-D500-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training70
PowerFlex 700S Phase II Maintenance and Troubleshooting
PFX700S2-LD
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThis skill-building course introduces concepts and techniques that will assist students in successfully maintaining and troubleshooting a PowerFlex 700S Phase II ACdrive. Students will learn how to recognize PowerFlex 700S Phase II drive hardware and properly wire the drive. Students will also learn to diagnose specific load-related, environmental, and equipment faults. Throughout the course, students will use the LCD HIM, DriveExplorer software, and DriveExecutive software to clearfaults and alarms. After each demonstration, students will be given an application-based exercise that offers extensive hands-on practice using the PowerFlex 700S drive.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Understand PowerFlex 700S Phase II Hardware• Configure Drive Parameters• Configure Motor Control Options• Select Speed Feedback Options• Configure a Gear-In Application• Configure Synchlink Communications• Troubleshoot a PowerFlex 700S Phase II Drive• Install and Configure a ControlNet Communications Adapter• Install and Configure an EtherNet Communications Adapter
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101) or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals responsible for starting up, configuring, maintaining, and troubleshooting PowerFlex 700S Phase II drives should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedPowerFlex 700S Phase II Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-20D-DRG71
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
AutoMax Maintenance andTroubleshooting
RE0520
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis course is designed to provide students with a general understanding of AutoMax hardware and to acquire the necessary skills to analyze the AutoMax processors for information needed to troubleshoot the system. Students will also be provided an opportunity to monitor and load an AutoMax processor and to locatethe necessary points for voltage measurements. After completing this course, students will understand AutoMax hardware in order to perform basic troubleshooting.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• AutoMax Concepts• Hardware • AutoMax Executive• Configuration• PC Task• Basic Language• Control Block Language
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Familiarity with test equipment and drive systems• Completion of the DC Drives and AutoMax/DCS Introduction course (RE0505)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for the installation, maintenance, and repair ofAutoMax systems should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 71
1336 IMPACT TroubleshootingCCA132
1 Day CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis course covers the skills needed to successfully troubleshoot a 1336 IMPACT™ AC drive. Students will also receive practice during the course using multiple programming interfaces, such as the Human Interface Module (HIM), Graphic Programming Terminal (GPT), and DriveTools software. Throughout the course, studentswill also receive hands-on experience using a troubleshooting guide to quickly isolate and resolve drive problems. This course is designed as a stand-alone course or itcan be taken in conjunction with other IMPACT courses for future skill development.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Test a Drive Using Electrical Measuring Tools• Troubleshoot a Drive• Troubleshoot Drive Problems• Isolate Drive Problems
Prerequisites• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices• Experience using a drive programming interface• Experience using a multimeter, ammeter, oscilloscope, and megger
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to troubleshoot a 1336 IMPACT AC drive shouldattend this course.
Job Aids Included1336 IMPACT Quick Reference Guide ABT-1336E-TQR901336 IMPACT Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1336E-TSJ20DriveTools Procedures Guide ABT-D500-TSJ501336 IMPACT Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1336E-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
1336 PLUS Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCA129
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThis course provides students with procedures to replace, initially program, and troubleshoot a 1336 PLUS™ AC drive system. Students will learn how to identify andreplace drive equipment and perform system checks. Students will also have the opportunity to use the Human Interface Module (HIM) and DriveTools software tolocate, monitor, and modify drive parameters. In addition, students will learn to identify and correct drive system problems. Integrated practice sessions will providestudents with the opportunity to combine the skills they learn in a real-world scenario.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Recognize Hardware• Replace Drive System Equipment• Perform Pre-Power and Power-On Checks• Locate, Monitor, and Modify Parameters• Configure the Drive for Initial Start-Up • Verify Initial Operation and Motor and Feedback Wiring• Troubleshoot and Correct Drive System Problems
Prerequisites• Working knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices• Experience using a multimeter, ammeter, and oscilloscope• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to replace, start up, maintain, and troubleshoot a 1336 PLUS AC drive system should attend this course.
Job Aids Included1336 PLUS and PLUS II Quick Reference Guide ABT-1336SF-TQR90DriveTools Procedures Guide ABT-D500-TSJ501336 PLUS Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1336S-TSJ20
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training72
1336 PLUS II Maintenance and Troubleshooting
CCA137
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThis course prepares students to re-install 1336 PLUS II drive hardware components, make changes to the setup, and troubleshoot drive malfunctions. Students willtroubleshoot and repair a 1336 PLUS II drive, learning how to help decrease the downtime of equipment. Students will have the opportunity to maximize 1336 PLUS IIdrive investments by taking advantage of the vast networking options and learning how to configure a 1336 PLUS II drive to communicate on various networks.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Replace and Wire Drive Hardware• Test a Drive Using Electrical Measuring Tools• Perform Drive Pre-Power and Power-On Checks• Modify Drive Parameters Using the Human Interface Module• Locate, Monitor, and Modify Drive Parameters Using DriveTools
and DriveExplorer Software• Start Up a Drive• Configure Communications• Troubleshoot and Repair a Drive
Prerequisites• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices • Experience using electrical measuring tools, such as a multimeter, megger, oscilloscope, etc.• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to replace, start up, maintain, and troubleshoot a 1336 PLUS II drive should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedDriveTools Procedures Guide ABT-D500-TSJ50 DriveExplorer Procedures Guide ABT-D500-TSJ51 1336 PLUS II Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1336F-TSJ20 1336 PLUS and PLUS II Quick Reference Guide ABT-1336SF-TQR90 1336 PLUS and PLUS II Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1336SF-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
PowerFlex 700 Vector ControlMaintenance and Troubleshooting
CCA163
1 Day CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis skill-building course introduces concepts and techniques that will assist students in successfully maintaining and troubleshooting a PowerFlex 700 AC drive.Students will learn how to recognize PowerFlex 700 drive hardware and properly wire the drive. Students will also learn to diagnose specific load-related, environmental, and equipment faults. Throughout the course, students will use the LCD HIM, DriveExplorer, and DriveExecutive software to clear faults and alarms.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Replace and Rewire PowerFlex 700 Drive Hardware• Troubleshoot and Clear PowerFlex 700 Alarms• Troubleshoot PowerFlex 700 Drive, Load, and Environmental Faults• Troubleshoot PowerFlex 700 Drive Equipment Malfunctions
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals responsible for maintaining and troubleshooting PowerFlex 700 drivesshould take this course.
Job Aids IncludedPowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Troubleshooting Guide ABT-20B-TSJ20PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector ControlProcedures Guide ABT-20B-TSJ50PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector ControlQuick Reference Guide ABT-20AB-TQR90PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector ControlDocumentation Reference Guide CD ABT-20AB-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 73
PowerFlex 700S Phase I Maintenance and Troubleshooting
PFX700S-LD
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThis skill-building course introduces concepts and techniques that will assist students in successfully maintaining and troubleshooting a PowerFlex 700S Phase I AC drive.Students will learn how to recognize PowerFlex 700S Phase I drive hardware and properly wire the drive. Students will also learn to diagnose specific load-related, environmental, and equipment faults. Throughout the course, the students will use the LCD HIM, DriveExplorer software, and DriveExecutive software to clear faults andalarms. After each demonstration, students will be given an application-based exercise that offers extensive hands-on practice using the PowerFlex 700S Phase I drive.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Understand PowerFlex 700S Hardware• Configure Drive Parameters• Configure Motor Control Options• Select Speed Feedback Options• Configure a Gear-In Application• Configure Synchlink Communications• Troubleshoot a PowerFlex 700S Drive• Install and Configure a ControlNet Communications Adapter• Install and Configure an EtherNet Communications Adapter
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Prerequisites continued• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals responsible for starting up, configuring, maintaining, and troubleshooting PowerFlex 700S Phase I drives should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedPowerFlex 700S Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-20D-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
1336 IMPACT StartupCCA133
1 Day CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis course covers the skills needed to replace and initially install a 1336 IMPACT AC drive. The procedures for drive replacement, initial installation, pre-power andpower-on checks, and start-up for fast commissioning and autotuning will be covered. Students will then practice these procedures using a 1336 IMPACT drive workstation and multiple programming interfaces, such as the Human Interface Module (HIM), Graphic Programming Terminal, and DriveTools software. This courseis designed as a stand-alone course or it can be taken in conjunction with other IMPACT courses for further skill development.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Prevent Electrostatic Damage to Drive Components• Identify Drive Hardware• Replace Drive Hardware• Perform Drive Pre-Power and Power-On Checks• Modify Drive Parameters and Links• Start Up a Drive
Prerequisites• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience• Experience using a multimeter, ammeter, and oscilloscope
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to install, initially program, and start up a 1336 IMPACT AC drive should attend this course.
Job Aids Included1336 IMPACT Quick Reference Guide ABT-1336E-TQR90DriveTools Procedures Guide ABT-D500-TSJ501336 IMPACT Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1336E-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training74
1336 IMPACT ProgrammingCCA138
1 Day CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis course provides students with the skills to program a 1336 IMPACT drive. Students will learn how to control the application and performance of the drive usingseveral programmable features. Students will also learn how to modify these programmable features using the Human Interface Module (HIM), Graphic ProgrammingModule (GPT), and DriveTools32 software. Students will become competent with identifying and programming the drives to meet product demands. This course isdesigned as a stand-alone course or it can be taken in conjunction with other IMPACT courses for further skill development.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Locate and Modify Drive Parameters• Program Initial 1336 IMPACT Drive Parameters• Program Speed Control for the 1336 IMPACT Drive• Configure Scale and Offset Parameters for Analog I/O
Prerequisites• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices• Completion of the AC/DC Motor and Drive Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to program a 1336 IMPACT drive for optimum performanceshould attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedDriveTools Procedures Guide ABT-D500-TSJ501336 IMPACT Quick Reference Guide ABT-1336E-TQR90
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
1336 IMPACT CommunicationsCCA135
1 Day CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis course will provide students with the skills needed to configure 1336 IMPACT AC drive communications. Throughout the course, students will receive hands-onexperience configuring the 1336 IMPACT drive for communications via remote I/O (RIO) and a SCANport™ module. Students receive practice during the course usingmultiple programming interfaces, such as the Human Interface Module (HIM), Graphic Programming Terminal (GPT), and DriveTools software. This course is designedas a stand-alone course or it can be taken in conjunction with other IMPACT courses for further skill development.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Configure and Calibrate Digital and Analog I/O• Configure the 1336 IMPACT Drive for Communications Via a
SCANport Gateway Module• Configure the Drive for PLC Communications Via RIO• Transfer Discrete Data through RIO
Prerequisites• General knowledge of electrical principles, circuits, and safety practices• Working knowledge of PLC-5 processors and AC/DC motors and drives, or• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)• Completion of the 1336 IMPACT Programming course (CCA138)
is recommended
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to configure 1336 IMPACT AC drive communications should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedDrive Tools Procedures Guide ABT-D500-TSJ501336 IMPACT Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1336E-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 75
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communications on ControlNet
CCA164
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course introduces students to techniques and instructions that will assist them in starting up a PowerFlex 700 AC drive and commissioning it on a ControlNet network.Students will learn how to configure PowerFlex 700 drive parameters and install and commission a ControlNet communications adapter. Students will also learn to configure a ControlNet network and create network connections for Logix5000 controllers.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Configure Drive Parameters Using an LCD HIM• Upload and Download PowerFlex 700 Drive Data• Start Up a PowerFlex 700 Drive• Install and Configure a PowerFlex 700 Drive ControlNet Communications Adapter• Configure an Offline ControlNet Network• Go Online to a ControlNet Network• Enter Scheduled ControlNet I/O Data Connections for Logix5000 Controllers• Enter ControlNet Messages for Logix5000 Controllers• Control PowerFlex 700 Drive Operation
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course ( CCA101)
or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals responsible for configuring parameters and starting upPowerFlex 700 drives should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedPowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector ControlQuick Reference Guide ABT-20AB-TQR90PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector ControlProcedures Guide ABT-20B-TSJ50PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector ControlDocumentation Reference Guide CD ABT-20AB-DRG70ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide ABT-N200-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
PowerFlex 700 Vector ControlConfiguration and Startup
CCA161
1 Day CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis skill-building course introduces techniques and instructions that will assist students in successfully configuring and starting up a PowerFlex 700 AC drive.Throughout the course, the instructor will demonstrate how to configure PowerFlex 700 drive parameters. The instructor will also demonstrate how to install and commission remote I/O, DeviceNet, and ControlNet communications adapters. Then students will practice these tasks during hands-on exercises. This course isdesigned as a stand-alone course, or it can be taken in conjunction with other PowerFlex 700 courses for further skill development.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Configure Drive Parameters Using DriveExplorer Software• Configure Drive Parameters Using DriveExecutive Software• Start Up a Drive• Control Drive Operation• Install and Configure a Remote I/O Communications Adapter• Install and Configure a DeviceNet, ControlNet, and EtherNet
Communications Adapter
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the AC/DC Motor and Drive Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals responsible for configuring parameters and starting upPowerFlex 700 drives should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedPowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector ControlProcedures Guide ABT-20B-TSJ50PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector ControlQuick Reference Guide ABT-20AB-TQR90PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector ControlDocumentation Reference Guide CD ABT-20AB-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training76
AutoMax Programming FundamentalsRE0523
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis course is designed to present students with the elementary details of the AutoMax programming languages. Students will be provided an opportunity to become oriented with and use both the online and offline AutoMax Executive screens. After completing this course, students will be able to use the AutoMax ExecutiveProgram, understand the differences in AutoMax languages, and use a variety of AutoMax programming features.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Hardware Overview • PC Tasks• Tasking • Control Block• AutoMax Variables • Reliance Basics• Configuration • Network
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Familiarity with drive Systems, AutoMax hardware, and AutoMax Executive• Completion of one or both of the following courses:
- DC Drives and AutoMax/DCS Introduction (RE0505)- AutoMax Maintenance and Troubleshooting (RE0520)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for modifying and/or adding functionality to theirAutoMax system should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communications on DeviceNet
CCA162
1 Day CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis skill-building course introduces techniques and instructions that will assist students in successfully configuring a PowerFlex 700 AC drive to communicate on anexisting DeviceNet network. Throughout the course, the instructor will demonstrate how to use RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software to perform tasks, such as browsingthe network, commissioning the PowerFlex 700 node, and configuring drive parameters. Students will also learn about scanner module configuration and input andoutput mapping. This course is designed as a stand-alone course or it can be taken in conjunction with other PowerFlex 700 courses for further skill development.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Connect a Drive to a DeviceNet Network• Commission a Node on a DeviceNet Network• Configure Drive and Adapter Parameters Using RSNetWorx for
DeviceNet Software• Manage DeviceNet EDS Files for the Drive• Configure a DeviceNet Scanner Module to Communicate with a Drive• Map Drive Inputs and Outputs on a DeviceNet Network
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals responsible for configuring PowerFlex 700 drives to communicate on aDeviceNet network should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedPowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector ControlProcedures Guide ABT-20B-TSJ50DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide ABT-N100-TSJ50PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector ControlDocumentation Reference Guide CD ABT-20AB-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 77
IntelliCENTERCCI105-LD
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThis course provides the concepts, knowledge, and tools necessary to design, specify, install, troubleshoot, and use an IntelliCENTER MCC or DeviceNet MCC. During thecourse, students will employ control and communication architectures by solving sample architecture problems presented in class. Students will also learn to use varioussoftware tools associated with DeviceNet MCCs, such as RSLinx and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software. The last day focuses on network configuration, mapping of scanners, and PLC programming in a DeviceNet MCC system.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Connect to the Motor Control Center (MCC)• Monitor a Starter with Electronic Overload• Configure E3 Electronic Overload Relay• Understand EDS Files• Understand RSLinx and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet Software• Replace a Device• Insert and Configure DNET and ENET Modules in a ControlLogix Chassis• Understand PLC Programs for IntelliCENTER Devices• Map Devices to a DeviceNet Scanner
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Familiarity with PLC programming software• Familiarity with RSLogix 5000, RSLinx, and RSNetWorx for DeviceNet software
is recommended but not required• Completion of the AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals course (CCA101)
is recommended
Who Should AttendControl engineers, electrical technicians, and system integrators who will beinvolved in designing, installing, and using IntelliCENTER/DeviceNet MCCs shouldattend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Our Training Voucher Account maximizes your training budget by allowing you to prepurchasevouchers for Rockwell Automation training coursesand products at a discounted cost (up to 20%). Youcan redeem the vouchers at the time that best meetsthe individual needs and schedule of each employee.
The vouchers can be redeemed at any time withinone year for instructor-led courses, self-paced training,job aids, and workstations. A convenient onlineaccount management tool and monthly statement help you track your voucher usage.
For more information, call 440-646-3434 (Option 4),contact your local Allen-Bradley Distributor or visit:www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Savings and Flexibility - Training Voucher AccountDo you have diverse employee development needs but a limited training budget?
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training78
Virtual Classroom
Welcome to the Future ofInstructor-Led Training!
Rockwell Automation interactive Virtual Classroomprovides access to front-line training on latebreaking information. The Virtual Classroomblends the accessibility of web-based trainingwith the feedback of a live instructor to deliveressential Rockwell Automation training to your employees. Even if you cannot attend the training live, you will be able to tune in anytimeafter the event to view a recorded session.
Interactive virtual classrooms are short one- or two-hour training sessions conductedby a knowledgeable instructor via the Internet.More than a web seminar or simple lecture,these sessions on new technologies and products provide the following engaging features thatenhance a student’s learning experience.
Features:
• Blended presentation and demonstration formats• Dynamic question and answer sessions• Group polls with instantly displayable results• Desktop sharing, or ability for students to take over
the control of the instructor’s automation software• Playback option for future refresher training
Benefits
Real-time e-learning has been proven to help organizations increase employee knowledge, skills,and productivity while eliminating travel costs.
ROCKWELL AUTOMATION
Registration
To register for Virtual Classroom training or anyRockwell Automation training course, contact yourlocal Allen-Bradley distributor. Or, call 440-646-3434(Option 4) to be routed to the nearest RockwellAutomation Training Coordinator.
Process Control
©20
06 R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n, In
c. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.81
ww
w.ro
ckw
ella
utom
atio
n.co
m/s
ervi
ces/
train
ing
80
Opt
iona
lIn
struc
tor-L
ed T
rain
ing
Und
ersta
ndM
aint
ain
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 4
:Ph
aseM
anag
erPr
ojec
t Des
ign
CC
P711
1D
ay
Fact
oryT
alk
Batc
h M
aint
enan
ce a
ndTr
oubl
esho
otin
g(fo
rmer
ly R
SBiz
War
e Ba
tch)
RS-B
AM
TRG
5D
ays
Fact
oryT
alk
Batc
h Se
rver
and
Co
nfig
urat
ion
Tool
s(fo
rmer
ly R
SBiz
War
e Ba
tch)
RS-B
ATRG
5D
ays
RSLo
gix
5000
Lev
el 4
: Fu
nctio
nBl
ock
Prog
ram
min
g
CC
P152
2D
ays
Fact
oryT
alk
Batc
h Ph
ase
Des
ign
(form
erly
RSB
izW
are
Batc
h)
RS-A
BATR
G3
Day
s
Und
ersta
nd
Mai
ntai
n
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
Proc
ess
Cont
rol C
urric
ulum
Map
Basi
c Pr
oces
s Co
ntro
l U
sing
Smar
tIns
trum
enta
tion
CC
PC01
3D
ays
PID
Loo
p Ba
sics
CC
P708
-LD4
Day
s
FOU
ND
ATIO
NFi
eldb
usBa
sics
CC
PC02
-LD4
Day
s
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training82
Basic Process Control Using SmartInstrumentation
CCPC01
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThis skill and knowledge building course provides students with the fundamentals of basic measurement technology used in a process control environment. Industryexperts from Endress+Hauser and Rockwell Automation will introduce students to the benefits of using open protocols with basic measurement technologies, such aslevel, flow, temperature, pressure, and analytical devices. A series of hands-on exercises will provide students with a basic understanding of Rockwell Automationsolutions that will help connect Smart instrument networks to a Rockwell Automation system.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Common Protocols Overview• Understand HART Communications• Configure and Calibrate HART Smart Instruments Using Hand-Held Configurators
and FieldCare Software• Apply HART Smart Instrument Networks to Rockwell Automation Systems• Configure and Calibrate Smart Instruments Using RSFieldbus Software• Apply FOUNDATION Fieldbus Smart Instrument Networks to
Rockwell Automation Systems
Prerequisites• The ability to preform basic Microsoft Windows tasks • Basic understanding of process instruments, RSLogix 5000 Programming
experience, and function block programming experience are helpful but not required
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have little or no working experience with Smart instrumentation,HART technologies, or FOUNDATION Fieldbus should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
FactoryTalk Batch Maintenance and Troubleshooting (formerly RSBizWare™ Batch)
RS-BAMTRG
5 Days CEUs 3.5
Course PurposeThis course is designed to expose students to a multitude of problems that could be encountered with any FactoryTalk Batch system. The course focuses on good batchsystem design to reduce potential problems. Emphasis is placed on troubleshooting techniques used to isolate, diagnose, and remedy a vast array of problems thatmight be experienced in any application.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Use Various FactoryTalk Batch Tools• Understand Phase Programming• Use Troubleshooting Techniques• Understand Design Considerations• Isolate and Fix Various Problems Using Diagnostic Tools• Perform Maintenance Functions
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the FactoryTalk Batch Server and Configuration Tools course
(RS-BATRG)Optional• Completion of the FactoryTalk Batch Phase Design course (RS-ABATRG)
or 6 months experience with a FactoryTalk batch system• Familiarity with S88 Batch Standard is helpful
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for maintaining and supporting a FactoryTalkBatch system should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 83
FOUNDATION Fieldbus BasicsCCPC02-LD
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis advanced skill and knowledge building course provides students with the necessary foundations of using open protocols with multiple measurement technologies,such as temperature and pressure. Output devices, such as valve positioners, will also be covered. Students will be presented with FOUNDATION Fieldbus technologiesusing the Rockwell Automation 1757-FFLD and 1788-CN2FF linking device. Additional material on Device Descriptions, advanced function block theory, and troubleshooting techniques will be covered in this course. Students will perform hands-on exercises to provide them with an understanding of how to connect theirSmart instrument networks to a Rockwell Automation system.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Fieldbus Basics• Fieldbus Function Blocks• Fieldbus Device Description Files• Fieldbus Communications• Fieldbus Wiring and Media Components• Relcom FBT-3 Fieldbus Monitor Usage and Operation• FOUNDATION and ControlNet to FOUNDATION Fieldbus Linking Device
and Software• HSE OPC Server• 1757-FFLD and 1788-CN2FF Troubleshooting
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks • Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Programming course (CCP151) and/or• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have little or no working experience with Smart instrumentationor FOUNDATION Fieldbus should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
PID Loop BasicsCCP708-LD
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeThis course provides students with the resources and hands-on practice required to configure a PID Loop utilizing both ladder logic and function blocks. Students willalso be provided with a working knowledge of tuning principles (closed and open loop) and the applicability of each depending on the process environment. Studentswill learn how to create PID/PIDE loops and feedback simulation, tune the loops created, and determine which is appropriate depending on process operations. In addition, the use of advanced control strategies, such as cascade control and feed forward control, will be reviewed.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Create PID Loops in Ladder Logic• Create PID Loops in Function Blocks• Tune PID Loops Using Closed Loop Tuning and Open Loop Tuning• Create FF Loops and Split Range Loops
Prerequisites• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals
course (CCP146)• ISA Process Control Fundamentals training or equivalent experience is
recommended
Who Should AttendProject and service engineers who are responsible for developing and tuning a PID loop.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training84
FactoryTalk Batch Phase Design(formerly RSBizWare Batch)
RS-ABATRG
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThis course is designed to expose students to creating phases (manual, automated, PC-based, and material based) used in recipes for a FactoryTalk Batch system.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Define the Programming Hierarchy Involved in Implementing Automated Phases• Create Phases Able to Communicate to the FactoryTalk Batch Server via PLI• Create and Monitor Control Batches• Use the Equipment Editor to Define Manual Phases
Prerequisites• Completion of the FactoryTalk Batch Server and Configuration Tools course
(RS-BATRG)• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Who Should AttendIndividuals who intend to implement an FactoryTalk Batch system that utilizesmanual, automated, PC-based, or material phases should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Function Block Programming
CCP152
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course provides students with an understanding of RSLogix 5000 function block diagrams and terminology. Resources and hands-on practice are also providedto program a Logix5000 controller using function block diagrams. Students will perform parameter modifications to function block instructions and create anddevelop function block diagram programs and routines.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Create a Function Block Diagram• Program Logical Function Block Instructions• Program Timer and Counter Function Block Instructions• Program Analog Function Block Instructions
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Understanding of basic measurement and control theory,
including basic loop control• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course
(CCP143) or equivalent experience
Who Should AttendIndividuals responsible for developing, debugging, and programming Logix5000controllers using function block diagrams should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedRSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Standard Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 85
RSLogix 5000 Level 4:PhaseManager Project Design
CCP711
1 Day CEUs 0.7
Course PurposeThis course is intended to provide students with the skills to configure and program Logix5000 applications in accordance with the S88 state model using thePhaseManager feature. This course presents a tool that will help you effectively organize and structure batch applications. Students will organize an RSLogix 5000project by identifying control and equipment modules within application code. Students will separate equipment code from equipment phase code, configure statelogic to transition between equipment states, and complete a project that uses an internal sequencer to activate each of the equipment phases according to a batch procedure.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Define Equipment Phases and State Models in an RSLogix 5000 Project• Separate Equipment Code from Equipment Phase Code• Monitor and Command Phase States• Configure an Internal Sequencer Using Phase Instructions
Prerequisites• Ability to perform basic Microsoft Windows tasks• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development course (CCP143)
or advanced programming experience using RSLogix 5000 software• Familiarity with sequential function chart programming language
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to apply the S88 state model to RSLogix 5000 projects forany Logix5000 controller should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
FactoryTalk Batch Server and Configuration Tools (formerly RSBizWare Batch)
RS-BATRG
5 Days CEUs 3.5
Course PurposeThis course provides complete coverage of the FactoryTalk Batch system, including an introduction to batch processing and the ISA S88.01 Standard. FactoryTalk Batch system architecture, system operation, and system configuration are covered in detail.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Compare and Contrast Continuous, Discrete, and Batch Processes• State the Typical Functions of a Batch System• Identify the Components of the S99 Equipment Model• Create, Monitor, and Control Batches• Use the Equipment Editor• Use the Recipe Editor• Use Object Model and Active X Controls
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Familiarity with S88 Batch Standard is helpful
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are involved with the installation, setup, and operation ofFactoryTalk control systems should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training86
Knowledge Transfer Through Performance-Based Courses
Instructor-Led Courses
Looking for world-class courses that will affect overallproductivity and your bottom line? Choose from our instructor-led courses:
• SSttaannddaarrdd CCoouurrsseess - Over 250 open-enrollment classes focused on relevent technologies and job tasks
• TTaaiilloorreedd CCoouurrsseess - Combine lessons on job tasks from 1600 learning modules to match your needs
• CCuussttoomm CCoouurrsseess - Training designed with your equipment, software, and specifications in mind
• OOnn--SSiittee CCoouurrsseess - Any Rockwell Automation course at your facility or another convenient location
• VViirrttuuaall CCllaassssrroooomm - Live instructor-led courses via your computer
• EEmmbbeeddddeedd IInnssttrruuccttoorrss - Ongoing in-house training with unparalleled immediacy and responsiveness
• CCeerrttiiffiiccaattiioonn - Individual controls and networks certification for market differentiation through product mastery
INSTRUCT
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
New!
Free Pre- and Post-Test services are available with standard on-site courses togauge knowledge transfer and demonstratea return on investment.
Condition Monitoring
©20
06 R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n, In
c. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.89
ww
w.ro
ckw
ella
utom
atio
n.co
m/s
ervi
ces/
train
ing
88
Opt
iona
lIn
struc
tor-L
ed T
rain
ing
Und
ersta
ndPr
ogra
m a
nd D
esig
n
Vib
ratio
n A
naly
sis:
Leve
l ll
EK-IC
M26
13.
5 D
ays
Tim
e W
avef
orm
Ana
lysi
s
EK-IC
M28
12
Day
s
Vib
ratio
n A
naly
sis:
Leve
l lll
EK-IC
M30
13.
5 D
ays
Enpa
c A
pplic
atio
ns
EK-IC
M16
23
Day
s
Und
ersta
nd
Prog
ram
and
Des
ign
Cond
ition
Mon
itorin
g Cu
rric
ulum
Map
Vib
ratio
n A
naly
sis:
Leve
l l
EK-IC
M20
13.
5 D
ays
Dyn
amic
Bal
anci
ng
EK-IC
M12
13
Day
s
Vib
ratio
n A
naly
sis
Fund
amen
tals
EK-IC
M10
13
Day
s
Emon
itor
Basi
c
EK-IC
M14
14
Day
s
XM S
yste
mFu
ndam
enta
ls
EK-IC
M16
52
Day
s
Emon
itor
Adv
ance
d
EK-IC
M22
14
Day
s
Dat
apac
App
licat
ions
EK-IC
M16
13
Day
s
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training90
Vibration Analysis FundamentalsEK-ICM101
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThis course is designed for the new user of vibration analysis or predictive maintenance instrumentation or for the individual that desires to become more familiar withthe basics of vibration. The relationship between the mechanical condition of machinery and vibration is presented. This background helps show how vibration detectionand analysis can be used in a cost-effective program to identify machinery problems and schedule repairs to avoid costly machine downtime. Basic vibration measuresincluding amplitude, frequency, and phase are discussed. The material in this course is applicable to all vendors’ vibration data collection or analysis equipment.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Vibration Measurement• Fourier Transform• Displacement, Velocity, Acceleration• Transducer Set-Up• Mounting Techniques• Digital Instrument FFT• Set-Up and Measurement Choices• Single Plane Balancing
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendNew users of vibration analysis or predictive maintenance systems should attendthis course. Students will realize significant benefits from the practical hands-onmeasurement exercises using modern data collectors and analyzers.
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Vibration Analysis: Level 1EK-ICM201
3.5 Days
Course PurposeThe fundamental information necessary to implement and operate a successful predictive maintenance program is presented in this seminar. Vibration basics and therelationship between vibration and machinery condition are reviewed. Proven techniques for specifying meaningful overall and spectrum band alarm limits for a widevariety of machinery is presented. An optional certification test is administered during the last half day of this course. The material in this course is applicable to allvendors’ vibration data collection or analysis equipment.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Characteristics of Vibration and Review of Severity Charts• Vibration Transducer Overview and Selection Criteria• Role of Spike Energy, HFD, and Shock Pulse and Alarm Levels• Vibration Signature Analysis to Diagnose Machine Problems• How to Track Rolling Element Bearing Health• Methods for Specifying Spectral Alarm Band Levels and Frequencies• Common Pitfalls in Vibration Measurements
Prerequisites• 6 months or more of field experience • Completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals (EK-ICM101)
or similar course.
Who Should AttendMechanics, technicians, engineers, or analysts involved in the maintenance or operation of plant machinery should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training CEUs 2.1
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 91
CEUs 2.13.5 Days Vibration Analysis: Level ll
EK-ICM261
Course PurposeThis seminar is designed to advance the knowledge base of vibration analysts having one to three years of experience. The course begins with a brief review ofVibration Analysis I topics and then moves to more in-depth applications of the illustrated vibration diagnostic chart. Advanced alarm setting techniques based on statistical analysis are explained for both overall and band alarms. Advanced measurement techniques including natural frequency testing and high frequency envelopesignal analysis are covered. An optional certification test is administered during the last half day of this course. The material in this course is applicable to all vendors’vibration data collection or analysis equipment.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Data Acquisition and FFT Processing for Reliable Spectral Analysis• Introduction to Natural Frequency Test Methods• Vibration Diagnostics Using Phase Analysis and Cascade Diagrams• Vibration Signature Analysis Using the Vibration Diagnostic Chart• Introduction to Narrowband Envelope (Statistical) Alarms• Introduction to Isolation and Damping
Prerequisites• 12 months or more of field experience • Completion of the Vibration Analysis: Level 1 (EK-ICM201) or similar course
Who Should AttendMechanics, technicians, engineers, or analysts involved in predictive maintenanceor vibration analysis should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
3.5 Days CEUs 2.1Vibration Analysis: Level III
EK-ICM301
Course PurposeIn this advanced course, several powerful techniques, including high frequency envelope signal analysis, time waveform, and deflection shape analysis, are presentedto increase the effectiveness of experienced vibration analysts. The analysis of high speed, low speed, and variable speed machinery is presented with consideration of the special transducer and instrumentation requirements of these applications. An optional certification test is administered during the last half day of this course.The material in this course is applicable to all vendors’ vibration data collection or analysis equipment.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Introduction to Motor Current Spectral Analysis• How to Detect Problems with DC Motors and Their Controls• Time Waveform Analysis• How to Analyze High Speed Machines• How to Analyze Variable Speed Machines• How to Evaluate the Achievements of Your Plant’s
Condition Monitoring Program
Prerequisites• 18 months or more of experience in vibration analysis or predictive maintenance• Completion of an Entek Vibration Analysis: Level II (EK-ICM261) or other similar
course is recommended.
Who Should AttendMechanics, technicians, engineers, or analysts involved in predictive maintenanceor vibration analysis should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training92
3 Days CEUs 1.75Dynamic Balancing
EK-ICM121
Course PurposeIdentifying and effectively correcting balance problems are the focus of this course. The course begins by defining unbalance and explaining the benefits of properlybalanced rotating machinery. Various methods of solving unbalance problems including single-plane, two-plane, and multi-plane techniques are presented. Each ofthese solution methods is taught for both in place field balancing and balancing machine applications. An optional certification test is administered during the lasthalf day of this course.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Introduction to Dynamic Balancing• Basic Principal of Balancing• Use of Phase to Determine the Types of Unbalance• Rigid vs. Flexible Rotors• Critical Speed/Resonance• Single-Plane Vector Balancing• Bearing vs. Shaft Vibration
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course, but previous balancing experience ishelpful and completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals (EK-ICM101) course is recommended.
Who Should AttendAnyone who has involvement in balancing and machine reliability, who currentlydoes balancing work either on a balancing stand or in the field, or who specifies balancing tolerances or design machines should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Time Waveform AnalysisEK-ICM281
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course emphasizes the use of time waveform data to accurately identify a wide range of vibration phenomena not easily detected using spectral data. Real-worldcase histories are used to demonstrate how time waveform analysis can identify problems likely missed by standard spectral analysis, as well as to confirm results ofspectral analysis. The material in this course is applicable to all vendors’ vibration data collection or analysis equipment.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Introduction to Time Waveform Analysis (TWA)• Time Waveform Benefits and Fundamentals• Setup Parameters for TWA• Interpretation of Time Waveform Data• Hands-On Lab Exercises and Natural Frequency Testing• Time Synchronous Averaging• Case Histories Utilizing Time Waveform Analysis
Prerequisites• Completion of the Vibration Analysis: Level ll (EK-ICM261) or similar course • 9 to 12 months experience with vibration spectral analysis is recommended
Who Should AttendExperienced analysts who have a thorough understanding of vibration fundamentals and want to better use this important diagnostic tool should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Advanced
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 93
XM System FundamentalsEK-ICM165
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course is a skill-building course that provides students with a basic understanding of XM® systems and terminology. This course also introduces students to XM system components and functionality. Students will have an opportunity to use the XM Serial Configuration Utility and RSMACC™ software to perform various software tasks. In addition, students will be introduced to vibration fundamentals and will have an opportunity to configure proximity probes and accelerometers connected to XM modules. Connecting non-vibration measurement devices to the appropriate XM module will also be discussed.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following tasks and topics:• Characteristics of Vibration• Introduction to RSMACC• Configure XM Modules through RSMACC and XM Serial Configuration Utility• Set-Up Measurements and Alarms for XM Systems• Overview of Each XM Module• Use of the XM440 Master Relay Module• Communicate through the XM500
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals (EK-ICM101) is recommended
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have little or no working experience with XM systems shouldattend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
4 Days CEUs 2.8Emonitor Basic
EK-ICM141
Course PurposeThis course will put students on the fast track to success using Emonitor®. Students will become familiar with the features and operation of Microsoft Windows andEmonitor. Instruction on the basics of installation, database set-up, and loading/unloading data collectors guide you through the process of gathering machinery information. Interpreting this information using a variety of plots and reports is then covered, helping students put their system to work solving machinery problems.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following tasks and topics:• Adding Additional Databases to Emonitor• Adding Hierarchy Images to the Database• Creating Lists with Tagging/Untagging• Adding Measurements• Data Collector Interfaces• Loading a List to a Data Collector
Prerequisites• Completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals (EK-ICM101) or similar course• A basic knowledge of Microsoft Windows
Who Should AttendAnyone who is new to Emonitor and must use it either daily to complete theirduties or only occasionally to look up data, run reports, or act as a systemadministrator should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training94
Datapac ApplicationsEK-ICM161
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThis course covers the full range of operations of the Datapac™ 1500, from basic to advanced, providing excellent information for beginning or experienced Datapac users.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Datapac Utility Program and Setup Options• Transfering Data Between the Datapac and Odyssey• Basic Operations Including Loading, Unloading and Collecting Overall and
Spectrum Data• Advanced Measurement Techniques (e.g. Time Waveform Collection, Time
Synchronous Averaging, Phase Measurement and Spike Energy Spectrum Collection)
• Frequency Response Function
Prerequisites• Completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals course (EK-ICM101) • Completion of the Emonitor Basic course (EK-ICM141) is recommended• 3 to 6 months experience with the Datapac 1500 is recommended
Who Should AttendIndividuals who use the Datapac and would like to learn more about the instrument’s data collection and vibration analysis capabilities should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
4 Days CEUs 2.8Emonitor Advanced
EK-ICM221
Course PurposeThis course helps the established user increase their efficiency and their overall program effectiveness using Emonitor. In-depth coverage of the program provides studentswith the information they need to customize operations for their specific machine applications. Set-up of advanced measurements and custom templates tailor the data-base to fit difficult machine applications. Customized reporting and plotting allows students to design program output that is most readily understood within their plant.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following tasks and topics:• Measurement Options and Advanced List Options• Load/Unload and Data Import Review• Statistical Alarming Capabilities• Efficient Use of Overall, Band, and Narrowband Statistical Alarms• Integrating Emonitor With Other Windows Applications and Other Predictive
Technologies (e.g. Infrared Thermography and Oil Analysis)• Create Custom Reports
Prerequisites• 1 year or more experience with Emonitor• Completion of the Vibration Analysis: Level 1 course (EK-ICM201) • A thorough working knowledge of Microsoft Windows is required.
Who Should AttendEstablished users of Emonitor who have one or more years of experience usingthe product should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 95
3 Days CEUs 2.1Enpac Applications
EK-ICM162
Course PurposeThis course covers the full range of operations of the Enpac® 1200 and Enpac 2500, from basic to advanced, providing excellent information for beginning or experienced Enpac users. Basic operations including loading, unloading, and collecting overall and spectrum data are presented, as well as advanced measurementtechniques, such as time waveform collection, time synchronous averaging, phase measurement, and spike energy spectrum collection. The Enpac two-plane balancing and two-channel applications are also covered in this course.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Enpac operating program and Setup Options• Route Configuration and Data Collection Options• Transfer of Data between the Enpac and Odyssey• Time Synchronous Measurements• Two-Channel Measurements• ESP and Spike Energy Overview• Phase Measurements• Balancing with the Enpac
Prerequisites• Completion of the Vibration Analysis Fundamentals (EK-ICM101) or similar course• Completion of the Emonitor Basic course (EK-ICM141) is recommended • 3 to 6 months experience with the Enpac 1200 or Enpac 2500 is recommended
Who Should AttendIndividuals who use the Enpac and would like to learn more about the instrument’sdata collection and vibration analysis capabilities should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Benefits• Location – at your facility and in your office• Live instructor emphasizing job-related training
relevant to your employees’ needs• Cost-savings - no travel expenses• Interactive question and answer sessions
Training...Without Leaving the Office
For more information about Rockwell AutomationVirtual Classroom training, call 440-646-3434 (Option 4) or contact your local Allen-Bradley Distributor orRockwell Automation Sales and Support office.
Rockwell Automation now offers Virtual Classroomtraining - short one to two-hour sessions conductedby a knowledgeable instructor via the Internet.More than a web seminar or simple lecture, these sessions can be made available for the following condition monitoring products:
• Datapac• Dynamic Balancing• Emonitor• Enpac• Vibration Analysis• XM
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training96
Reinforce Knowledge and Job Skills Through Learning ToolsPRACTICE
Self-Paced Tools
Would it help to have answers on handwhen a problem occurs?
Need to train operators without experimenting on your production line?
Job Aids are utilized on site whenand where problems occur to troubleshoot or use step-by-step procedures for accuracy and efficiency.
Workstations are the ideal tool to reinforce and practice maintenance,troubleshooting, and programming skills,train new employees or transition from one technology to another.
Now you can include Workstations on Rockwell Automation PartsManagement Agreements giving yougreater flexibility and value.
Software Courses
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training98
Rockwell Automation software courses addresstoday’s diverse plant information needs, such as:
• Production management – real-time coordination across plant-wide production processes
• Data management – tools and methods used for collecting, transforming, and integrating production information
• Asset management – optimizing maintenance and plant operations to improve resource availability
• Performance and visibility – offering a window into the process so plant personnel can make better decisions
Real-time exchange of information between manufacturing and the rest of your company is critical for making businessdecisions that improve responsiveness,increase productivity, and reduce costs.With Rockwell Automation softwarecourses, you can learn how to integrateyour factory floor.
Software Courses
Course Course Name Course Number Length
RS-MSSQLB Microsoft SQL Server for FactoryTalk Introduction 2 Days
RS-RSVBA Microsoft VBA with Rockwell Software and Microsoft Office 4 Days
RS-BIZ001 FactoryTalk Historian/Metrics (formerly RSBizWare) 4 Days
RS-ECPD01-LD RSEnterprise Controls Project Implementation 4.5 Days
RS-RSMACC RSMACC Installation and Configuration 3 Days
RS-RSQLTRG FactoryTalk Integration (formerly RSSql) 3 Days
RS-RSTS101-LD RSTestStand Enterprise Project Development 2 Days
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 99
Microsoft SQL Server for FactoryTalkIntroduction (formerly RSBizWare)
RS-MSSQLB
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course provides students with the technical skills required to implement a database solution with Microsoft SQL Server client/server database management system.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Discribe the Elements of Microsoft SQL Server and the Transact-SQL Language• Describe and Configure the Data Storage Architecture of SQL Server• Create and Manage Files, File Groups, Databases, Tables, and Transaction Logs• Enforce Data Integrity Using Constraints, Defaults, and Rules• Create and Maintain Indexes• Write Queries that Retrieve and Modify Data Using Joins and Subqueries• Create Views of Data• Design and Create Stored Procedures• Design and Create Triggers
Prerequisites• Experience using the Microsoft Windows NT Server network operating system• One year of experience with relational databases• Three to six months of SQL Server expertice
Prerequisites continued• Understanding of basic ANSI SQL statements
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to understand and implement a database solution with theMicrosoft SQL Server system should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Microsoft VBA with Rockwell Softwareand Microsoft Office
RS-RSVBA
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeIn this course, students will learn to develop and implement Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) procedures or subroutines within an RSView32 project. The coursecovers VBA concepts, an overview of the VBA language, the RSView32 software Object Model, and the creation, modification and execution of VBA proceduresfrom within RSView32 software. Students will also learn the fundamentals of Microsoft Excel, Word, and Access Object Models. Interacting with these ObjectModels from within RSView32 VBA procedures will allow users to create applications that perform such tasks as create and print Word documents or Excel spreadsheets with charts, and read and write to Access database files.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Understand VBA• Use UserForms in RSView32 VBA• Use Events in RSView32 VBA • Use Debugging Tools and Error Handling in VBA• Understand RSView32 Object Collections and Optimize Tag Read/Writes
within VBA Code• Access the RSView32 Object Model from an External Automation Controller• Control Microsoft Excel, Word, and Access with VBA• Understand OPC Automation with VBA• Control RSLogix 5 with VBA
Prerequisites• Familiarity with the Windows NT/95/98 user interface and RSView32 software • Basic familiarity with Rockwell Automation programmable controllers and Visual Basic concepts
Who Should AttendThis course is intended for individuals who wish to implement VBA procedureswithin their RSView32 projects to meet application requirements.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training100
FactoryTalk Historian/Metrics(formerly RSBizWare Historian/PlantMetrics)
RS-BIZ001
4 Days CEUs 2.8
Course PurposeFactoryTalk Historian is a complete, windows-based solution for the analysis of time-series process and production data. In this course, students will learn to use theHistorian data collection and data analysis functions to perform logging, reporting, and viewing of data. FactoryTalk Metrics builds on the reporting, analysis, and management capabilities of the Historian by providing students with a set of tools to analyze the performance of production assets. FactoryTalk Metrics provides a performance rating, based on the Overall Equipment Effectiveness (OEE) model, for every production asset. In this course, students will also learn to use the reporting,graphing, and querying functionality that makes FactoryTalk a complete and easy-to-use solution for data collection and analysis.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Install and Configure FactoryTalk Historian and Metrics• Create Time-Series and Non-Time-Series Charts• Use the FactoryTalk ActiveX Runtime Client• Create a Custom Calculator• Set Up a Log File Configuration• Configure Servers • Assign Activations and Permissions• Create a Plant Model Configuration• Configure Performance Parameters• Use Report Data Sources
Prerequisites• Familiarity with the Windows NT/2000 user interface and a basic understanding
of PLC processors
Prerequisites (continued)• Knowledge of basic client/server database concepts is recommended
but not required• Familiarity with basic networking concepts is recommended
but not required• Knowledge or experience with Microsoft SQL Server is helpful
Who Should AttendThis course is intended for individuals who need to collect PLC data, as well asanalyze and report that data.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
RSEnterprise Controls ProjectImplementation
RS-ECPD01-LD
4.5 Days CEUs 3.2
Course PurposeThis course provides students with an understanding of Enterprise Controls and terminology. This course also introduces students to Enterprise Controls componentsand functionality. Students will have an opportunity to use Enterprise Controls software to organize a Logic project using the Logic Library. Students will also operateand navigate with an Enterprise Controls Standard HMI Interface and use online tools within the Enterprise Controls Design Environment.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Prepare and Configure a Project Application• Use Online Tools within the Design Environment• Use the Online Tools for Debugging and Maintaining• Understand the Control Assemblies Feature• Configure Control Events• Understand ActiveX Controls• Understand Logic Library Project Components • Understand Implementation of a Custom Assembly Logic
Prerequisites• Experience operating a personal computer within a Microsoft Windows or Windows XP environment • Experience working with manufacturing equipment and controls • Experience with RSLinx, RSLogix 5000, RSView32, FactoryTalk View ME (ie., RSView ME) software is helpful but not required
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to develop or maintain Logic projects should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 101
RSMACC Installation and ConfigurationRS-RSMACC
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeThe purpose of this course is to provide students with fundamental information on the RSMACC software package, to include planning an RSMACC system, as well asRSSecurity overview, installation, configuration and change management. Students will receive hands-on practice using the various RSMACC components in live lab networked environments.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Install RSMACC Server Components on Server Machine• Configure RSMACC Server• Install RSMACC Client Components on Client Machine• Configure RSMACC Client Machine• Install and Configure RSMACC Change Management• Install and Configure RSMACC Network Health Components• Understand RSMACC Enterprise Online Condition Monitor (EOL) Components• Understand RSMACC Automated Asset Manager (AAM) Components
Prerequisites• Basic Microsoft Windows skills• Basic understanding of databases
Who Should AttendIndividuals who have recently purchased an RSMACC system, as well as those thathave systems installed and want to upgrade their knowledge of ChangeManagement, Network Health, Condition Monitoring, or AAM Components shouldattend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
FactoryTalk Integrator(formerly RSSql)
RS-RSQLTRG
3 Days CEUs 2.1
Course PurposeIn this course, students will learn to install and configure FactoryTalk Integrator in a Microsoft SQL Server environment. Students will install the FactoryTalk IntegratorControl Connection, Transaction Manager, and Enterprise Connection components. Then students will bind processor datapoints to SQL database fields using theFactoryTalk Integrator graphic user interface. After course completion, students will be able to create single-computer and distributed FactoryTalk Integrator configurations, configure DDE and FactoryTalk View Control Connections to plant floor devices, and configure ODBC and OCI Enterprise Connections to SQL databases.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Understand FactoryTalk Integrator Connectivity, Architecture, and Configurations• Create and Manage Configurations • Configure Control and Enterprise Connection Services• Understand Microsoft Access ODBC Configuration • Understand Microsoft SQL Server ODBC Configuration • Understand Oracle ODBC and OCI Configuration• Configure Transactions • Configure Scheduled Events • Create Expressions
Prerequisites• Knowledge of the Microsoft Windows NT operating system• Experience with SQL database software • Basic familiarity with PLC processors
Who Should AttendThis course is intended for individuals who use PLC data to manage or maintainplant processes.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training102
RSTestStand Enterprise Project Development
RS-RSTS101-LD
2 Days CEUs 1.4
Course PurposeThis course provides students with a working knowledge of the RSTestStand Enterprise control systems simulation software. Upon completion of this course, studentswill gain the skills to create, validate, troubleshoot, and tune RSTestStand Enterprise Projects using RSTestStand simulation software. This course also provides hands-on practices to reinforce the tasks involved in designing, testing, and implementing an effective simulation model of a machine and/or process. From creatingand running project models and run-time scenarios to animating scenes and binding actions to resources, students will have the opportunity to fully understand thecapabilities of RSTestStand Enterprise simulations and the benefits of this virtual modeling process with regard to start-up time, design flaw identification, problem resolution, and end-user training.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Create a Project Model• Create and Modify Resources• Build Operator Consoles and Create a Connection Diagram• Create Run-Time Scenarios• Create, Animate, and Control Scenes• Create and Run a Part Flow Model and Bind Actions to Resources• Build Logical Views• Troubleshoot and Tune RSTestStand Enterprise Projects Using Productivity Tools
Prerequisites• Experience working with the Microsoft Windows user interface• Basic understanding of PLC processors or completion of the
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals course (CCP122)• Knowledge of basic VB scripting concepts• Familiarity with basic OPC and detailed understanding of RSLinx software is recommended
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are responsible for designing, starting up, installing, and troubleshooting automation control systems and equipment should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
Training - The Rockwell Automation Difference
• SSuubbjjeecctt MMaatttteerr EExxppeerrttiissee - our technologies and our curricula
• EExxppeerriieenncceedd TTeecchhnniiccaall IInnssttrruuccttoorrss - real-world application experience and product expertise
• CCoouurrssee MMaatteerriiaallss - award-winning student materials
• PPrree-- aanndd PPoosstt--TTeessttiinngg - assessment to quantify and demonstrate a return on investment
• CCoouurrssee SSeelleeccttiioonn TTooooll - knowledge assessments to help students decide which course is rght for them
• WWoorrkkssttaattiioonnss - factory simulation tools for experiential learning
• JJoobb AAiiddss - plant floor procedures and troubleshooting
• IInntteerrnnaattiioonnaall AAssssoocciiaattiioonn ffoorr CCoonnttiinnuuiinngg EEdduuccaattiioonn aanndd TTrraaiinniinngg - authorized provider status
and CEUs for professional development
Classic Courses
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training104
Classic Courses
Rockwell Automation classic courses provide training for legacy or specialized automation products that are not typically included and advertised in the Rockwell Automation TrainingServices national course schedule. These coursesare available and can be scheduled as privateclasses held either at a Rockwell Automation training facility or on-site at your own facility.You can schedule these courses by request and by contacting your local Allen-Bradley Distributor orRockwell Automation sales representative.Minimum class size is eight students and the maximum is twelve students.
Course Course Name Course Number Length
CCA134 1336 FORCE Design and Startup 3 Days
CCA124 1336 FORCE™ Maintenance and Troubleshooting 3 Days
RE0526 AutoMax AC Drive Distributed Power System 4 Days
RE0525 AutoMax Advanced Programming 4 Days
RE0521 AutoMax DC Drive Distributed Power System 4 Days
RE0522 AutoMax DC Drive Four Card Drive Group 4 Days
RE0528 AutoMax Intermediate Programming 4 Days
RE0530 Distributed Power System - SA3100 and RGU/NRU 4 Days
RE0119 FlexPak 3000 AutoMax Communications 2.5 Days
RE0118 FlexPak 3000 Digital DC Drive 2 Days
RE0212 GV3000 and AutoMax Communications 2.5 Days
RE0211 GV3000 Vector Control AC Drive 2 Days
RE0527 SIGMA™ Universal Process Monitor (UOI) Interface 4 Days
Complete classic course descriptions can be foundon the Training Services website at: www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
General Industrial Courses
Delivered by: National Technology Transfer, Inc.
For more information visit:www.rockwellautomation.com/services/trainingfor dates, locations, and pricing
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training106
Safety & Compliance
Course Course Code
NFPA 70E/Arc Flash Electrical Safety NTT-PESNFPA 70E/Arc Flash Electrical Safetywith 3rd-Day Arc Flash Calculations Workshop NTT-PE3SElectrical Safety for Electric Power Generation,Transmission, and Distribution NTT-PHSNFPA 70E/Arc Flash Electrical Safety withElectrical Safety for Electric Power Generation,Transmission, and Distribution NTT-PE3HOSHA 10-Hour Training NTT-POHOSHA 30-Hour Training NTT-POSNational Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72) with NICET I / II NTT-PFA5NConfined Space Entry NTT-PCS
Fluid Power
Course Course Code
Hydraulics Training NTT-PHY4Hydraulics and System Troubleshooting NTT-PHY4TCentrifugal Pumps NTT-PPTHElectro-pneumatics Training NTT-PPNE
HVAC
Course Course Code
Boilers: A Technical and Operational Workshop NTT-PBOAir Conditioning and Refrigeration NTT-PAC5Principles of Heating Applications NTT-P5HAir Conditioning and Refrigeration with Principles of Heating Applications NTT-PHV5AChillers: Operation and Maintenance of Chilled Water Systems NTT-PCW
National Electrical Code
Course Course Code
Introduction to the 2005 National Electrical Code NTT-PEC2005 National Electrical Code and Grounding and Bonding NTT-PEC5GGrounding and Bonding of Electrical Systems NTT-PGR2005 National Electrical Code Changes NTT-PNU
Telecommunications
Course Course Code
Fiber Optic Training NTT-PFBAdvanced Fiber Optic Training NTT-PAF
Mechanical/Industrial Systems
Course Course Code
Welding: Principles, Practices, and Procedures NTT-PWTMechanical Drives/Power Transmission NTT-PMD
Electrical & Electronics
Course Course Code
Basics of Industrial Electricity NTT-PEYTroubleshooting Electrical Control Circuits NTT-PMCIntroduction to Instrumentation and Process Control NTT-PIA
General Industrial CoursesGeneral Industrial courses are available in a variety of industrial areas.
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 107
NFPA 70E/Arc Flash Electrical Safety with3rd-Day Arc Flash Calculations Workshop
NTT-PE3S
3 Days
Course PurposeThis course is designed to show students how current OSHA standards apply to their facility, including NFPA 70E. Students will learn and understand OSHA penalties fornoncompliance. Students will receive clarification regarding the safe installation and maintenance of electrical equipment. Students will also learn about personal protective equipment and grouping.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Electrical Hazards • Employee Training and Requirements • Proper Lockout-Tagout Procedures • Safe Electrical Work Practices • Protective Equipment • Test Equipment and Insulated Tools • Establish and Maintain Compliance • Electrical Inspections • Electrical Work Practices • Maintenance of Electrical Equipment • Switching and Clearing Procedures • Clearance Distances • Electrical Hazards in Confined Spaces • Portable Electrical Equipment • Fault Current Calculations
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to know arc flash electrical safety should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
NFPA 70E/Arc Flash Electrical SafetyNTT-PES
2 Days
Course PurposeThis course allows students to learn how current OSHA standards apply to their facility, including NFPA 70E, and understand OSHA penalties for noncompliance. Students also receive clarification regarding the safe installation and maintenance of electrical equipment, as well as personal protective equipment and grouping.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Electrical Hazards • Employee Training and Requirements • Proper Lockout-Tagout Procedures • Safe Electrical Work Practices • Protective Equipment • Test Equipment and Insulated Tools • Establish and Maintain Compliance • Electrical Inspections • Electrical Work Practices • Maintenance of Electrical Equipment • Switching and Clearing Procedures • Clearance Distances • Electrical Hazards in Confined Spaces • Portable Electrical Equipment • Fault Current Calculations
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to know current OSHA standards should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training108
NFPA 70E/Arc Flash Electrical Safety withElectrical Safety for Electric Power Generation,Transmission, and Distribution
NTT-PE3H
3 Days
Course PurposeThis course is designed to assist students in meeting mandatory training requirements with a combination of two days of low voltage and one day of high voltagetraining. Students will be trained according to OSHA standards for operations or maintenance work involving electric power generation, transmission, and distribution.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics andtasks:• How to Identify and Control Electrical Hazards • OSHA "Qualified Worker" Requirements • NFPA 70E Arc-Flash Requirements • Proper Application of OSHA's Electrical Safe Work Practices• Accurate Use and Selection of Personal Protective Equipment• How to Develop and Apply Proper High Voltage Switching Procedures • "Equipotential Grounding" and Application on the Job • OSHA Clearance Procedure Requirements • Training Requirements for High Voltage Workers According to OSHA
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who maintain, service, and/or install electric power generation, transmission, and distribution equipment should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
Electrical Safety for Electric Power Generation,Transmission, and Distribution
NTT-PHS
2 Days
Course PurposeThis course covers the OSHA Requirement 29 CFR 1910.269 for electric power generation, transmission, and distribution. This course serves as the refresher trainingthat OSHA recognizes as critical and continual. By continually training individuals who work with high voltages, the likelihood of an accident is decreased by ensuringthat all individuals actually remember and use safe work practices.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics and tasks:• Required Inspections • What a Periodic Inspection Means • Concepts of Minimum Approach Distance and FR Clothing • How to Accomplish EPZ Grounding • Ways to Create a Safe Work Environment • Ways to Avoid Accidents
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to be trained on the OSHA requirements for electric powergeneration should attend this course. In addition, individuals who work with highvoltages or who need refresher training to ensure safe work practices shouldattend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 109
OSHA 30-Hour TrainingNTT-POS
4 Days
Course PurposeThis comprehensive course provides students with the information necessary to inform and train employees properly. In addition, students will learn to design andimplement an employee protection program. This course is best suited for an individual who is planning on training other employees on the OSHA safety standards inthe commercial or industrial setting. Such a course will positively influence a “safety culture” in the workplace, thereby reducing downtime and injuries and increasingproductivity.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics and tasks:• Tips on How to Avoid OSHA Citations • The Most Violated OSHA Rules • How to Create a Safer Working Environment • How to Solve Your Own Voluntary Compliance Problems • How to Positively Influence Attitudes About Safety • How to Reduce Insurance Costs• How to Become Recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor for OSHA Training
Prerequisites• Completion of the OSHA 10-Hour Training course (NTT-POH)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who plan to design and implement an employee safety training program in a commercial or industrial setting should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
OSHA 10-Hour TrainingNTT-POH
2 Days
Course PurposeThis courses provide students with the information they need to inform and train employees properly. Upon completion of this course, students will understand how todesign and put into place employee protection programs.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics and tasks: • Tips on How to Avoid OSHA Citations • The Most Violated OSHA Rules • How to Create a Safer Working Environment• How to Solve Your Own Voluntary Compliance Problems • How to Positively Influence Attitudes About Safety • How to Reduce Insurance Costs• How to Become Recognized by the U.S. Department of Labor for OSHA Training
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who plan to design and implement an employee safety training program in a commercial or industrial setting should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training110
Confined Space Entry NTT-PCS
1 Day
Course PurposeThis course provides students with information they need to know to be in compliance. Students will learn how to develop and establish an effective confined spaceprogram. Students will also learn how to properly identify Permit-Required spaces and how to set up and use an entry permit.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics andtasks:• Confined Space • Hazards Associated with Confined Spaces • Labeling Requirements • Training Requirements • How to Prevent Unauthorized Entry • Emergency Response Requirements
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need a better understanding of confined space and compliancerequirements should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72) with NICET I / II
NTT-PFA5N
5 Days
Course PurposeThe course teaches students how to determine which NFPA 72 chapter is applicable for a particular situation. Students will also learn how to understand the differencesin requirements in NFPA 72, ADA (ADAAG), and UFAS documents.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics andtasks:• Which NFPA Standards Require Fire Alarm Systems to be Installed • How to Identify Components of a Typical Fire Alarm System • How to Identify a 2-Wire or 4-Wire System • How to Lay Out a Fire Alarm System Using Basic Components • How to Determine Proper System Installation Points and Techniques • Compliance with Article 760 and 800• How to Prepare for the NICET I & II Certification Test
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to know the National Fire Alarm code should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 111
2005 National Electrical Code and Grounding and Bonding
NTT-PEC5G
2 Days
Course PurposeThis course demystifies the requirements of the National Electrical Code and provides basic instruction on the newest editions. Instructors discuss rules to minimize riskof electricity as a source of electric shock and as an ignition source of fire. This course helps to clarify and refine the students’ grasp of grounding. Students will learnabout grounding requirements as they relate to Article 250 and other articles of the 2005 NEC. Students will understand rules to minimize the risk of electricity as asource of electric shock and as an ignition source of fires and explosions.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Purpose and Scope of the NEC and Implications • Protective Systems and Safety Measures Specific to Marine Petroleum-related
Environments • Standards and Globalization with Best Practices Recommendations• NEC Requirements for Grounding • Purpose of Grounding and Bonding • Types of Systems that Cannot be Grounded • Types of Systems that Can be Operated Ungrounded • Properly Identify Grounding Conductors • Neutral Conductor as a Grounded Conductor • Methods of Grounding Electrical Systems • Common Elements in Clearing Ground Faults and Short Circuits
Job Aids IncludedIAEI Soares Book on GroundingNEC 2005 Code Book
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to be trained on the 2005 National Electrical Code as wellas grounding and bonding should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
Introduction to the 2005 National Electrical Code
NTT-PEC
3 Days
Course PurposeThis course delivers critical electrical information. Students learn about the 2005 National Electrical Code, complete with the latest changes and how it impacts them.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics and tasks::• Expanded AFCI Protection in Wiring Systems • New Rules for GFCI Protection • Identification of Ungrounded Branch Circuit and Feeder Conductors • Reorganized Rules in Article 220: Branch Circuit,
Feeder and Service Calculations • New Zone Hazardous Area Classification System for Combustible Dusts and
Ignitable Fibers and Flyings • New Articles for Control Panels and Speed-Drive Systems
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to know the 2005 National Electrical Code should attendthis course.
Job Aids IncludedNEC 2005 Code book“Electrical Systems” Code Reference book
Difficulty Level Beginner
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training112
2005 National Electrical Code ChangesNTT-PNU
2 Days
Course PurposeThis intensive course provides students with a review of the changes made to the National Electrical Code, including the rules and articles new in 2005. This courseis designed to clarify and explain the changes to the requirements of the NEC.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Purpose and Scope of NEC Changes • Significant Changes to the 2005 NEC • Changes to Selection and Sizing Conductors for Applications,
Physical Environments, and Layouts• When and Where Ground Fault Protection of Equipment is Required • How the Grounding Requirements Have Changed for Building Services • "Class", "Divisions", and "Group", and Implications on Design,
Installation, and Maintenance of Electrical Systems in Hazardous Cassified Locations
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to be trained on the 2005 National Electrical Code shouldattend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
Grounding and Bonding of Electrical SystemsNTT-PGR
2 Days
Course PurposeThis course clarifies and refines the students’ grasp of grounding. Students will learn about grounding requirements as they relate to Article 250 and other articles ofthe 2005 NEC. During the course, students will learn rules to minimize the risk of electricity as a source of electric shock and as an ignition source of fires and explosions.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• NEC Requirements for Grounding • Purpose of Grounding and Bonding • Types of Systems that Cannot be Grounded • Types of Systems that Can be Operated Ungrounded • Properly Identify Grounding Conductors • Neutral Conductor as a Grounded Conductor • Methods of Grounding Electrical Systems • Common Elements in Clearing Ground Faults and Short Circuits
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to be trained on grounding and bonding as they relate tothe 2005 National Electrical Code should attend this course.
Job Aids IncludedNEC 2005 Code bookIAEI Soares Book on Grounding
Difficulty Level Beginner
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 113
Troubleshooting Electrical Control CircuitsNTT-PMC
3 Days
Course PurposeDuring this course students will spend a minimum of 70% of the time actually working at a troubleshooting station with circuits that are identical in every respect tomotor control circuits in a plant. This course teaches hands-on troubleshooting techniques using the simple circuit and gradually becoming more complex. This coursecovers all of the standard motor control circuits used in the industry.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Fault Location• Circuit Conditions• Common Circuits for Controlling Pumps, Air Compressors, Hydraulic Systems,
Heating, and Air Conditioning• Troubleshooting Techniques
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to troubleshoot electrical control systems should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
Basics of Industrial ElectricityNTT-PEY
3 Days
Course PurposeThis course allows students to learn key concepts reinforced with hands-on activities. This course is also designed to teach non-electrical personnel the basic nature ofelectricity in the workplace. Electrical theory is explained in simple, easy-to-understand terms without complex mathematical equations.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Fundamentals
- Electricity - Effective Use of the Multimeter and Interpretation of Measurements- Electrical Safety - AC and DC Voltage and Current - Transformer Operation - Generator Action and Principles - Troubleshooting Electrical Circuits
• Applications - Electrical Terminology - Motor Operation (AC and DC) - Relay Operation - Timers, Contactors, and Motor Starters
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to know basic industrial electricity concepts should attendthis course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training114
Boilers: A Technical and Operational WorkshopNTT-PBO
3 Days
Course PurposeThis course begins at the introductory level with a discussion of boiler components, language, and key operating criteria. The course then transitions into more complextopics and exercises with hands-on training stations to reinforce the understanding of the critical set-up and operating features of the boiler equipment. The course concludes with a summary discussion of the essential operating features followed by a presentation regarding preventive maintenance tips and practical troubleshooting.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Boiler Construction Features and Essential Components • Flame Safeguard and Burner Component Details • Wiring and Programmer Diagrams • Boiler, Burner, and Programmer Integration • Common Failure Modes and Prevention • Preventive Maintenance Considerations • Advanced Troubleshooting and Problem-Solving
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who maintain, service, and/or install boiler equipment should attendthis course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
Introduction to Instrumentation and Process Control
NTT-PIA
3 Days
Course PurposeThis course offers students the opportunity to work hands-on with various process control instruments. By segmenting this course into small groups, students will haveample first-hand instruction to program, connect input/output devices, solve elementary and then more complex problems, and troubleshoot devices.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics and tasks:• How Instruments Measure Temperature, Pressure, Flowrate, Level, etc. • Causes of Errors in Instruments• How to Minimize and Troubleshoot Instrument Errors • Difference between Open and Closed Loop Controls, Feedback
and Feed Forward Controls, PLC, DCS, and Stand-alone Controllers • How Analog Signals are Produced, Processed, and Protected from Noise • Proportional, PI, and PID Control Strategies • How to Calibrate Transmitters • How to Tune Controllers
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals, such as operations personnel, maintenance personnel, engineers, andtechnicians, who need to gain instrumentation skills should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 115
Principles of Heating ApplicationsNTT-P5H
2 Days
Course PurposeThis course covers heating systems, including forced air furnaces and rooftop packaged systems, air movement and balance, fans, filters, pilot burner systems, andflame safeguard devices. This course also covers methods for troubleshooting air conditioning plus heating and ventilating system electrical and mechanical problems.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Heating Principles • Heating System Wiring and Troubleshooting • Gas-Fired Heating Systems • Troubleshooting Ignition Problems • Electrical Components of HVAC Systems• Energy Conservation Measures
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to understand the principles of heating applications shouldattend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
Air Conditioning and RefrigerationNTT-PAC5
3 Days
Course PurposeThis course provides students with a basic understanding of air conditioning and refrigeration. The practical applications of air conditioning and refrigeration indomestic, commercial, and heat pumps are covered. An understanding of servicing and troubleshooting techniques is also taught.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Principles of Refrigeration and Air Conditioning• Maintenance and Repair of Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment• Tools and Test Equipment Used to Operate, Maintain, and Troubleshoot
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment• Compressors, Evaporators, Metering Devices, and Condensers• Fundamentals of Diagnosing and Correcting Malfunctions in System Components• Safe Handling of Refrigerants, Refrigerant Classification, and Applications
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who maintain, service, and/or install refrigeration or air conditioningequipment should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training116
Chillers: Operation and Maintenance ofChilled Water Systems
NTT-PCW
3 Days
Course PurposeThis course focuses on how to monitor a system, avoid water treatment problems, and spot problems. This course will help students find out how to select the bestwater treatment program and vendor for their needs. It also provides students with the skills and experience necessary to keep systems functioning at optimum performance. Students will receive up-to-date information on the latest technology so they will understand all of the available options for maintaining their system at peak performance.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Water Quality Standards and Treatment for Chilled Water and Towers • Chilled Water System Operation • Glycol (Antifreeze) Systems • Chiller Design • Types of Chillers • Compression and Absorption Machines • Cooling Towers: Operation and Maintenance • Advanced Troubleshooting and Problem-Solving
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who operate and maintain chilled water system equipment shouldattend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration with Principles of Heating Applications
NTT-PHV5A
5 Days
Course PurposeThis course is designed to instruct students on heating systems, including forced air furnaces and rooftop packaged systems, air movement and balance, fans, filters, pilot burner systems, and flame safeguard devices. Students will also learn how to legally recover, recycle, and reclaim refrigerants, as well as troubleshoot air conditioning system electrical and mechanical problems.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Air-Conditioning and Heating Principles • New Refrigerant Blends Including R-410a • Refrigeration System Operation • Heating System Wiring and Troubleshooting • Energy Conservation Measures
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who maintain, service, and/or install air conditioning, refrigeration, and heating units should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 117
Hydraulics and System TroubleshootingNTT-PHY4T
4 Days
Course PurposeThis course teaches students to construct, operate, and troubleshoot actual operating systems using common hydraulic components. Typically 50% of the componentsreplaced may not be the source of problems in hydraulic systems. This course will teach students how to properly troubleshoot hydraulic systems.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Troubleshoot No Fluid Flow Situation • Measurement Instruments Used to Detect True Cavitations • Causes of Blown Shaft Seals on Hydraulic Pumps,
Excessive High Fluid Temperature, and Extreme High Pressures
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who need to troubleshoot hydraulics and hydraulic systems shouldattend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
Hydraulics TrainingNTT-PHY4
3 Days
Course PurposeThis course offers students the opportunity to increase their knowledge of basic hydraulics and fluid power applications. Students will learn about basic hydraulic components, how they work, and their function in a hydraulic circuit. Students will complete several hands-on training stations throughout the duration of this course.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Pumps• Hydraulics Motors• Cylinders• Fluids, Flow Controls, and Pressure Controls
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who work with hydraulic and fluid power applications should attendthis course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training118
Electro-pneumatics Training NTT-PPNE
3 Days
Course PurposeThis course offers students the opportunity to learn through hands-on activities. Students will learn about the control of pneumatic actuators, latching of electrical signals, logic controls, timers, and counters. Students will gain real-world knowledge about the hybrid technology of electro-pneumatics. After a brief introduction tocompressed air technology, students will learn and understand the electrical ladder diagram, the components, and their symbols.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics andtasks:• Basic Components of a Pneumatic System and Function • How to Read Pneumatic and Electro-pneumatic Schematics • Basic Troubleshooting
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who work with electro-pneumatics should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
Centrifugal Pumps NTT-PPTH
3 Days
Course PurposeStudents will learn how pumps are designed and examine all of the elements of centrifugal pumps. This course will cover how pumps work, how to calculate pumpenergy costs, and the real design differences between major pump types. Students will also learn how to properly install, care for, and troubleshoot a pump.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics and tasks:• Pump Performance • Reading Pump Curves • How Specific Speed Governs Pump Designs • Suction Specific Speed • Design Differences between Major Pump Types • Reading Pump Curves and Understanding the Real Importance of System Curves • Recirculation • Shaft Deflection • Energy Cost Calulations • Pump Terminology • Pump Installation • Care for Bearings • New Pump Startup
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who work with centrifical pumps should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
Course Objectives continued• How to Troubleshoot Mechanical Seal Failures• Air Entrainment • Difference between Closed and Open Pumping Systems
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 119
Advanced Fiber Optic Training NTT-PAF
3 Days
Course PurposeThis course is designed to teach students to take control of their communications optic networks. This course focuses on how to install, test, and certify fiber opticnetworks correctly.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Techniques for Terminating and Splicing Fiber • Testing and Troubleshooting • Installation Techniques • Test Equipment: OTDRs, Power Meters/Light Sources, Microscopes,
and Continuity Testers • Design Considerations and Specification Requirements • Budget/Loss Analysis Techniques for Fiber Optic Circuits
Prerequisites• Completion of the Fiber Optic Training course (NTT-PFB)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who maintain, service, and/or install a communications optic networkshould attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
Fiber Optic Training NTT-PFB
3 Days
Course PurposeThis course provides students with information on testing and troubleshooting, installation techniques, procedures on how to install, test, and certify fiber optic networks, design considerations, and the correct way to document fiber optic networks.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics and tasks:• Fiber Optic Safety Procedures and Practices • Inspect Multimode Fiber Optic Connectors for Quality • Build and Inspect Hotmelt Multimode ST Connectors • Build and Inspect Epoxy Multimode ST Connectors • Build and Inspect Epoxy Multimode SC Connectors • Use a Power Meter and Light Source to Evaluate Fiber Circuits • Build and Test a Mechanical Splice • OTDR Operations and Testing
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who maintain, service, and/or install a communications optic networkshould attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training120
Mechanical Drives/Power TransmissionNTT-PMD
3 Days
Course PurposeThis course offers students the opportunity to examine all of the common mechanical drives, including belts, and gears. Students will learn proper alignment and fastening techniques, as well as the role of proper lubrication. This course also covers troubleshooting and how to spot symptoms of failure and select the appropriate remedy.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics:• Proper Installation and Maintenance Methods • Proper Tensions • Correct Alignment Procedures • Proper Lubrication Methods • Proper Bearing Selection • Symptoms of Failure • Appropriate Remedy Selections
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who work with mechanical drives and power transmission applicationsshould attend this course.
Difficulty Level Beginner
Welding: Principles, Practices, and ProceduresNTT-PWT
3 Days
Course PurposeThis course focuses on aspects of applied metallurgy, welding process applications, and related safety. Students will learn about the maintenance process of welding technology.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will understand the following topics and tasks:• Shielded Metal Arc Welding • Gas Metal Arc and Flux Cored Arc Welding • Gas Tungsten Arc Welding • Oxy-Acetylene Welding, Flame Cutting, and Gouging• Air Carbon-Arc Gouging • Plasma Arc Cutting and Gouging • Welding and Cutting Safety • Troubleshooting Weld Defects • Controlling Weld Quality • Understanding Metals • Repair Welding Procedures and Principles • Equipment Preventive Maintenance
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this course.
Who Should AttendIndividuals who work with all forms of welding process applications in a commercial or industrial setting should attend this course.
Difficulty Level Intermediate
Computer-Based Training
©20
06 R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n, In
c. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.12
3w
ww
.rock
wel
laut
omat
ion.
com
/ser
vice
s/tra
inin
g12
2
RSTr
aine
r En
terp
rise
Editi
on P
rodu
cts
Com
pute
r-Bas
ed T
rain
ing
9393
-RSC
OM
P500
RSCo
mpa
nion
for
SLC
500
and
Mic
roLo
gix
Proc
esso
rs
9393
-RST
LINX
(939
3-RS
TLIN
XEN
F)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Linx
Sof
twar
e
9393
-RST
SMG
REN
F
RSTr
aine
r St
uden
t Man
ager
9393
-RST
VMEP
T2(9
393-
RSTM
EPT2
ENF)
RSTr
aine
r fo
r RS
Vie
w M
E So
ftwar
e-
Dra
win
g O
bjec
ts
9393
-RST
LX5K
OFF
(939
3-RS
TLKO
FFEN
F)
RSTr
aine
r fo
r RS
Logi
x 50
00
Softw
are-
O
fflin
e Pr
ogra
mm
ing
9393
-RST
LX5K
ON
(939
3-RS
TLKO
NEN
F)
RSTr
aine
r fo
r RS
Logi
x 50
00
Softw
are-
O
nlin
e M
onito
ring
9393
-RST
VMEP
T3(9
393-
RSTM
EPT3
ENF)
RSTr
aine
r fo
r RS
Vie
w M
E So
ftwar
e-
Inte
ract
ive
Obj
ects
RSV
iew
ME
Softw
are
Bund
le93
93-R
STV
MEA
LL(9
393-
RSTM
EALL
ENF)
9393
-RST
LX5K
MO
T(9
393-
RSTL
KMO
TEN
F)
RSTr
aine
r fo
r RS
Logi
x 50
00
Softw
are-
Mot
ion
9393
-RST
500O
NEN
E(9
393-
RST5
00O
NEN
F)
RSTr
aine
r fo
r RS
Logi
x 50
0 So
ftwar
e-O
nlin
e M
onito
ring
RSTr
aine
r fo
r RS
Logi
x 50
0 So
ftwar
e-D
ocum
entin
g an
d Se
arch
ing
RSLo
gix
5000
So
ftwar
e Bu
ndle
9393
-RST
LX5K
ALL
(939
3-RS
TLKA
LLEN
F)
RSLo
gix
500
Softw
are
Bund
le93
93-R
ST50
0ALE
NE
(939
3-RS
T500
ALE
NF)
SLC
/RSL
ogix
500
PLC
/RSL
ogix
5
Con
trolLo
gix/
RSLo
gix
5000
Oth
er
Visu
aliz
atio
n
Com
pute
r-Ba
sed
Trai
ning
Cur
ricul
um M
ap
9393
-RST
500O
FEN
E(9
393-
RST5
00O
FEN
F)
RSTr
aine
r fo
r RS
Logi
x 50
0 So
ftwar
e-O
fflin
e Pr
ogra
mm
ing
9393
-RST
LX5K
PRJ
(939
3-RS
TLKP
RJEN
F)
RSTr
aine
r fo
r RS
Logi
x 50
00
Softw
are-
Proj
ect C
onfig
urat
ion
9393
-RST
VMEP
T1(9
393-
RSTM
EPT1
ENF)
RSTr
aine
r fo
r RS
Vie
w M
E So
ftwar
e-A
pplic
atio
ns
and
Dis
play
s
9393
-RST
AC
D(9
393-
RSTA
CDE
NF)
RSTr
aine
r fo
r Fu
ndam
enta
ls
of A
C/D
C M
otor
san
d D
rives
9393
-RST
CLX
(939
3-RS
TCLX
ENF)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rCo
ntro
lLog
ix
Fund
amen
tals
9393
-RST
LX5
(939
3-RS
TLX5
ENF)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rRS
Logi
x 5
Softw
are
9393
-RST
SLC
(939
3-RS
TSLC
ENF)
RSTr
aine
r fo
r SL
C 50
0Fu
ndam
enta
ls
9393
-RST
HYD
(939
3-RS
THYD
ENF)
RSTr
aine
r fo
rH
ydra
ulic
s
Com
ing
Soon
!Co
min
gSo
on!
9393
-RST
500D
SEN
E(9
393-
RST5
00DS
ENF)
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training124
** RRSSTTrraaiinneerr EEnntteerrpprriissee EEddiittiioonn pprroodduucctt
RSTrainer for RSView ME Software –Applications and Displays
9393-RSTVMEPT19393-RSTMEPT1ENF*
5 Hours
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to create and configure a human-machine interface (HMI) application. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSView Machine Edition (ME) software. Students will learn how to create displays and tags, configure application settings, and import and export tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example RSView ME applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following tasks:• Use the Application Explorer• Create a New Display• Use the Startup Editor• Use Project Settings• Configure Security Options• Use Direct-Reference Tags• Create New HMI Tags• Use HMI Tags• Import and Export the Tag Database
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Knowledge of common HMI and controller terms and operation is suggested.
Intended AudienceIndividuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSView ME softwareshould complete this computer-based training.
Related ProductsRSView32 Procedures Guide ABT-9301-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Intermediate
9393-RSTVMEPT29393-RSTMEPT2ENF*
5 Hours
RSTrainer for RSView ME Software –Drawing Objects
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively add and animate basic drawing objects for graphic displays. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSView Machine Edition (ME) software.Students will learn how to add objects from the graphics library, arrange objects, and animate objects through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will learn about thevarious settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example RSView ME applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following tasks:• Understand Drawing Objects• Understand Object Properties• Arrange Objects• Add Objects from the Graphic Library• Use the Object Explorer• Animate Drawing Objects
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Knowledge of common HMI and controller terms and operation is suggested.• Completion of the RSTrainer for RSView ME Software – Applications and Displays (9393-RSTVMEPT1/9393-RSTMEPT1ENF)
e-Learning training course or equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended.
Intended AudienceIndividuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSView ME softwareshould complete this computer-based training.
Related ProductsRSView32 Procedures Guide ABT-9301-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Intermediate
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 125
** RRSSTTrraaiinneerr EEnntteerrpprriissee EEddiittiioonn pprroodduucctt
9393-RSTVMEPT39393-RSTMEPT3ENF*
5 Hours
RSTrainer for RSView ME Software –Interactive Objects
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure interactive objects for graphic displays. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSView Machine Edition (ME) software. Students will learn how to create and configure interactive objects, parameter files, and tag placeholders through step-by-step demonstrations. Students willalso learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example RSView ME applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following tasks:• Create Pushbuttons• Create Display Objects• Create Control List Selectors, Gauges, and Graph Objects• Create Display Navigation Objects• Create Local Message Displays• Add Advanced Features to Interactive Objects• Create Parameter Files and Tag Placeholders• Test Displays and Applications
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Knowledge of common HMI and controller terms and operation is suggested.
Prerequisites continued• Completion of the following e-Learning training courses or equivalent experience
with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:- RSTrainer for RSView ME Software – Applications and Displays
(9393-RSTVMEPT1/9393-RSTMEPT1ENF)- RSTrainer for RSView ME Software – Drawing Objects
(9393-RSTVMEPT2/9393-RSTMEPT2ENF)
Intended AudienceIndividuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSView ME softwareshould complete this computer-based training.
Related ProductsRSView32 Procedures Guide ABT-9301-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Intermediate
9393-RSTCLX9393-RSTCLXENF*
20 HoursRSTrainer for ControlLogix Fundamentals
Course PurposeThis computer-based training course provides students with an introduction to the ControlLogix control system. This course is designed to provide students with theessential introductory information required when working with a ControlLogix control system. This course includes an overview of the Logix5550, Logix5555, andLogix5563 controllers, I/O modules, communications modules, and motion modules. Students will learn how to navigate through RSLogix 5000 software and learnabout the four RSLogix 5000 programming languages. Through demonstrations, students will also learn about the various settings and options in the software and seehow to perform the required tasks for example control applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following topics:• ControlLogix Hardware• RSLogix 5000 Software Overview• Module Configuration (Connections, Module Configuration)• Tag Structures (Digital, Analog, DeviceNet, DH/RIO)• Programming (Languages, Project File, Numbering Systems)
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Intended AudienceIndividuals who need to identify, maintain, and configure ControlLogixhardware should complete this computer-based training.
Related ProductsLogix5000 System Glossary ABT-1756-TSG10Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1756-DRG70
Difficulty Level Beginner
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training126
** RRSSTTrraaiinneerr EEnntteerrpprriissee EEddiittiioonn pprroodduucctt
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration
9393-RSTLX5KPRJ9393-RSTLKPRJENF*
5 Hours
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure automation control projects. This course is available inboth computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn howto install and navigate through the software, create and configure a new project, and produce and consume tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Students willalso learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example automation control applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following tasks:• Install RSLogix 5000 Software• Configure the Display• Navigate through the Software• Create and Manage Project Files• Configure a Controller• Organize Tasks, Programs, and Routines• Configure a Local I/O Module• Produce and Consume Tags• Export and Import Tags
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Intended AudienceIndividuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 softwareshould complete this computer-based training.
Related ProductsLogix5000 System Glossary ABT-1756-TSG10RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1756-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
9393-RSTLX5KOFF9393-RSTLKOFFENF*
5 Hours
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software –Offline Programming
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure automation control projects. This course is available inboth computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn howto install and navigate through the software, create and configure a new project, and produce and consume tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Through thedemonstrations, students will also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example automation control applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following tasks:• Enter and Edit Ladder Logic Elements• Configure Ladder Logic Display Options• Enter and Edit Function Block Diagrams• Configure Function Block Diagram Display Options• Enter and Edit Structured Text• Configure the Structured Text Display• Verify Project Components• Search and Replace Text
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration (9393-RSTLX5KPRJ/9393-RSTLKPRJENF)
e-Learning training course or equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended.
Intended AudienceIndividuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 softwareshould complete this computer-based training.
Related ProductsLogix5000 System Glossary ABT-1756-TSG10RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSG50Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1756-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 127
** RRSSTTrraaiinneerr EEnntteerrpprriissee EEddiittiioonn pprroodduucctt
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software –Online Monitoring
9393-RSTLX5KON9393-RSTLKONENF*
5 Hours
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively monitor and edit industrial control projects. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how toestablish communications, monitor the status of a project, program ladder logic online, and identify and correct faults through step-by-step demonstrations. Studentswill also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example automation control applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following tasks:• Establish Communications• Monitor Status• Print a Ladder Logic Routine• Identify and Correct Faults• Program Ladder Logic Online• Print a Function Block Diagram
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the following e-Learning training courses or equivalent
experience with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:- RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration (9393-RSTLX5KPRJ/9393-RSTLKPRJENF) - RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming (9393-RSTLX5KOFF/9393-RSTLKOFFENF)
Intended AudienceIndividuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 softwareshould complete this computer-based training.
Related ProductsLogix5000 System Glossary ABT-1756-TSG10RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50ControlLogix and RSLogix 5000 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1756-TSJ20Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1756-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
9393-RSTLX5KMOT9393-RSTLKMOTENF*
5 Hours
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software –Motion
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively program motion control applications. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how toconfigure servo modules, program motion instructions, and test and tune axes through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will also learn about the various settingsand options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example motion applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following tasks:• Configure the Servo Modules• Configure the Controller• Add and Configure a SERCOS Servo Drive Axis• Add and Configure an Analog Servo Drive Axis• Understand the Motion Instruction Tag Structure• Compare Immediate and Synchronous Instructions• Test and Tune an Axis• Use Motion Direct CommandsPrerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the following e-Learning training courses or equivalent experience
with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:- RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration (9393-RSTLX5KPRJ/9393-RSTLKPRJENF)- RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming (9393-RSTLX5KOFF/9393-RSTLKOFFENF)- RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software – Online Monitoring (9393-RSTLX5KON/9393-RSTLKONENF)
Intended AudienceIndividuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 motion control software should complete this computer-based training.
Related ProductsLogix5000 System Glossary ABT-1756-TSG10RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Motion Control Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ52
Difficulty Level Advanced
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training128
** RRSSTTrraaiinneerr EEnntteerrpprriissee EEddiittiioonn pprroodduucctt
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5 Software9393-RSTLX5
9393-RSTLX5ENF*
20 Hours
Course PurposeThis computer-based training course covers the core tasks required for programming an RSLogix 5 project. This course provides information on how to install, configure,and navigate through RSLogix 5 software. Students will learn how to transfer an RSLogix 5 project from a computer to the processor, document ladder logic, and monitor data. Students will also learn about the various settings and options in the software.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following topics:• RSLogix 5 Software Installation• Screen Layout, Navigation, and Help• Offline Programming (New Project, Ladder Logic Editing,
Database Documentation, Reports, Backup Utilities)• Online Programming (Communications, Diagnostics)
Intended AudienceIndividuals who need to use RSLogix 5 software to program, document, and troubleshoot a PLC-5 application should complete this computer-based training.
Related ProductsRSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide ABT-1785-TSJ53PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1785-TSJ22PLC 5 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1785-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
RSTrainer for SLC 500 Fundamentals9393-RSTSLC
9393-RSTSLCENF*
20 Hours
Course PurposeThis computer-based training course covers the fundamental principles behind the SLC 500 series of programmable controllers. This course covers the concepts, terminology, and basic hardware of SLC 500 programmable controllers. Students will learn about memory organization, addressing, and ladder logic concepts throughinteractive simulations. This course also provides an overview of RSLogix 500 software.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following topics:• SLC 500 Hardware Components• Addressing (Memory Organization, Address Types, Indexed and
Indirect Addressing)• Programming (RSLogix 500 Software, Numbering Systems, Ladder Programs,
Operating Cycles, Status File)
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Intended AudienceIndividuals who are new to the SLC 500 series of programmable controllersshould complete this computer-based training course.
Related ProductsSLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Difficulty Level Beginner
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 129
** RRSSTTrraaiinneerr EEnntteerrpprriissee EEddiittiioonn pprroodduucctt
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software –Offline Programming
9393-RST500OFENE9393-RST500OFENF*
5 Hours
Course PurposeThis interactive, computer-based training course teaches the core tasks required for programming an RSLogix 500 project. Specifically, this course provides informationon how to navigate through the RSLogix 500 software, create a new RSLogix 500 project, and enter ladder logic in a project. Helpful animations, background information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools. Students will also have the opportunity to practiceperforming software tasks through interactive simulations. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following tasks:• Navigate through the RSLogix 500 Software• Configure the Display• Create a New Project• Create Program and Data Files• Configure I/O Modules in a Project• Enter Ladder Logic• Copy, Paste, and Move Rungs
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Intended AudienceIndividuals responsible for programming projects using RSLogix 500 software andwho are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 softwareshould complete this computer-based training.
Related ProductsRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software 9393-EGLX500SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software –Online Monitoring
9393-RST500ONENE9393-RST500ONENF*
5 Hours
Course PurposeThis interactive, computer-based training course teaches the core tasks required for monitoring an RSLogix 500 project online. Specifically, this course provides information on how to configure RSLinx communications, go online with the SLC 500 processor, edit ladder logic online, and configure and use data monitoring tools.Helpful animations, background information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools. Students will alsohave the opportunity to practice performing software tasks through interactive simulations. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following tasks:• Configure Communications• Transfer an RSLogix 500 Project File• Edit Ladder Logic Online• Monitor Data• Force Inputs and Outputs
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the following e-Learning training course or equivalent
experience with RSLogix 500 software is recommended:- RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software – Offline Programming (9393-RST500OFENE/9393-RST500OFENF)
Intended AudienceIndividuals responsible for monitoring RSLogix 500 projects and who are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 software should complete this computer-based training.
Related ProductsRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software 9393-EGLX500SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training130
** RRSSTTrraaiinneerr EEnntteerrpprriissee EEddiittiioonn pprroodduucctt
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software –Documenting and Searching
9393-RST500DSENE9393-RST500DSENF*
5 Hours
Course PurposeThis interactive, computer-based training course teaches the core tasks required for documenting and searching an RSLogix 500 project. Specifically, this course provides information on how to use RSLogix 500 backup utilities, symbols, comments, database tools, and search functions. Helpful animations, background information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools. Students will also have the opportunity to practiceperforming software tasks through interactive simulations. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following tasks:• Use Backup Utilities• Add Symbols, Address Descriptions, Instruction, Rung Comments, and Page Titles• Use Database Tools and Import/Export a Database• Print Reports• Search a Project
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the following e-Learning training courses or equivalent experience
with RSLogix 500 software is recommended:- RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software – Offline Programming (9393-RST500OFENE/9393-RST500OFENF)- RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software – Online Monitoring (9393-RST500ONENE/9393-RST500ONENF)
Intended AudienceIndividuals responsible for programming projects using RSLogix 500 software andwho are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 softwareshould complete this computer-based training.
Related ProductsRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software 9393-EGLX500SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
RSCompanion for SLC 500 and MicroLogix Processors
9393-RSCOMP500
Course PurposeRSCompanion for SLC 500 and MicroLogix processors is an interactive reference tool that can save valuable startup time. By helping users develop and document ladder logic programs and assisting with installing and commissioning hardware, RSCompanion helps users make it all work together. RSCompanion can also be usedwith RSLogix 500 ladder logic editing software.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will have a betterunderstanding of the following reference information:• Processors• Hardware• Wizards• Addressing• Instructions• Toolbox - Software Tools
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Experience using RSLogix 500 software is helpful but not required
Intended AudienceIndividuals who need fast access to addressing and instruction set reference infor-mation to develope ladder logic programs more efficiently should concider this pro-gram. Individuals who need help with installing and commissioning SLC 500 andMicroLogix hardware should also consider this program.
Related ProductsRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1747-TSJ22Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software 9393-EGLX500SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
ComingSoon!
ComingSoon!
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 131
** RRSSTTrraaiinneerr EEnntteerrpprriissee EEddiittiioonn pprroodduucctt
RSTrainer for Fundamentals of AC/DC Motors and Drives
9393-RSTACD9393-RSTACDENF*
20 Hours
20 Hours
Course PurposeThis computer-based training course is a knowledge-building course that provides students with a basic understanding of AC and DC motor and drive concepts andterminology. This course is instructionally designed to teach students the necessary fundamental knowledge and skills required to begin attending more advancedinstallation, maintenance, and control courses. Students will learn to recognize AC and DC drive and motor hardware and functions through example drive applications.This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following tasks:• Recognize AC and DC Motor Hardware• Recognize AC and DC Drive Hardware• Monitor a Drive Using a HIM• Recognize Line Protection and Filtering Device Hardware and Functions• Recognize AC and DC Motor Braking Methods• Test a Drive Using Electrical Measuring Tools• Preform Pre-Power and Power-On Checks• Select a Drive for Basic Applications
Prerequisites• Understanding of basic electrical and electronic concepts• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Intended AudienceIndividuals who are unfamiliar with the control of AC and DC motors and drivesshould complete this computer-based training.
Related ProductsAC and DC Motor and Drive Glossary ABT-D100-TSG10
Difficulty Level Beginner
International Association forContinuing Education and Training
RSTrainer for Hydraulics9393-RSTHYD
9393-RSTHYDENF*
Course PurposeThis computer-based training course is designed to teach students the fundamental concepts, principles, and equipment used in hydraulic systems. Students gainknowledge about pumps, valves, actuators, and fluids that comprise hydraulic systems through detailed descriptions and animations. Problem-solving simulations andtroubleshooting situations help students learn about the operation and characteristics of various types of hydraulic equipment. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following topics:• Basic Functions and Principles of Hydraulic Systems• Pumps (Gear, Vane, Piston)• Valves (Pressure Control, Flow Control, Check, Directional Control)• Actuators (Linear, Rotary, Hydraulic Motors)• Fluids (Fluid Oil Additives, Conductors, and Fittings)
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Intended AudienceIndividuals who need to know components, functions, and basic operation ofhydraulic systems that include pumping, conducting, filtering, controlling, and actuating should complete this computer-based training.
Difficulty Level Beginner
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training132
** RRSSTTrraaiinneerr EEnntteerrpprriissee EEddiittiioonn pprroodduucctt
9393-RSTLINX9393-RSTLINXENF*
20 Hours
9393-RSTSMGRENF*
RSTrainer for RSLinx Software
RSTrainer Student Manager
Course PurposeThis computer-based skill-building course covers material for users who want to take full advantage of the powerful monitoring, configuration, communication, and diagnostic capabilities of RSLinx software. The skills students will learn will enable them to use RSLinx software for the acquisition of PLC data and to integrate thedisplay, archiving, and management of critical data. Students will learn to use RSLinx software to exchange data between Rockwell Automation hardware andsoftware products as well as Microsoft Office programs, third-party programs, or user-developed applications.
PurposeThis software is a student tracking and reporting utility for use with the RSTrainer series of computer-based training courses. It provides similar functionality to alearning management system by maintaining, recording, and managing student information for the RSTrainer computer-based training courses. This advanced system maintains every student’s progress, scores, and personal information in an easy-to-use interface and database system that eliminates the burden of manually documenting employee training information.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this computer-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following topics:• Driver Configuration• Diagnostic Tools and Utilities (Network Monitoring Tools, Configuration Tools
and Security, Utilities: Backup, Restore, EDS Hardware Installation Tools, etc.)• Client Application Communications (DDE/OPC Topics,
Alias Topics, DDE/OPC Diagnostics)
Software CapabilitiesThis software will allow the following information to be tracked for each studentcompleting the RSTrainer computer-based training courses:• Passwords and Log-on Information• Account and Program Access• Progress• Scores
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Working knowledge of programmable controllers
Prerequisites• Experience using a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Intended AudienceIndividuals who have a fundamental knowledge of programmable controllers andare interested in RSLinx software should complete this computer-based training.
Intended AudienceTraining professionals, managers, or supervisors who maintain several students’records and progress in a training program should consider the RSTrainer StudentManager program.
Related ProductsAll RSTrainer series of computer-based training courses
Difficulty Level Intermediate
Web-Based Training
©20
06 R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n, In
c. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.13
5w
ww
.rock
wel
laut
omat
ion.
com
/ser
vice
s/tra
inin
g13
4
Web
-Bas
ed T
rain
ing
– A
vaila
ble
on R
ockw
ell A
utom
atio
n U
nive
rsity
Onl
ine
Mob
ile E
lect
rical
Mob
ile H
ydra
ulic
sIn
dust
rial
Pneu
mat
ics
RSV
iew
ME
Softw
are-
D
raw
ing
Obj
ects
RSLo
gix
5000
So
ftwar
e-
Onl
ine
Mon
itorin
g
RSLo
gix
5000
So
ftwar
e-
Offl
ine
Prog
ram
min
g
RSV
iew
ME
Softw
are-
In
tera
ctiv
e O
bjec
ts
RSLo
gix
5000
So
ftwar
e-
Mot
ion
Indu
stria
l H
ydra
ulic
s
RSLo
gix
500
Softw
are-
O
nlin
e M
onito
ring
Gen
eral
Indu
stria
l
Con
trolLo
gix/
RSLo
gix
5000
SLC
/RSL
ogix
500
Visu
aliz
atio
n
Aut
omat
ion
Fund
amen
tals
Web
-Bas
ed T
rain
ing
Curr
icul
um M
ap
RSV
iew
ME
Softw
are-
App
licat
ions
an
d D
ispl
ays
Fund
amen
tals
of
AC/
DC
Mot
ors
and
Driv
es
RSLo
gix
5000
So
ftwar
e-Pr
ojec
t Co
nfig
urat
ion
RSLo
gix
500
Softw
are-
Offl
ine
Prog
ram
min
g
Indu
stria
l M
echa
nica
lIn
dust
rial
Elec
tric
al
PLC
Fund
amen
tals
RSLo
gix
500
Softw
are-
D
ocum
entin
g an
d Se
arch
ing
Com
ing
Soon
!Co
min
gSo
on!
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training136
Fundamentals of AC/DC Motors and Drives
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course is a knowledge-building course that provides students with a basic understanding of AC and DC motor and drive conceptsand terminology. This course is instructionally designed to teach students the necessary fundamental knowledge and skills required to begin attending more advancedinstallation, maintenance, and control courses. Students will learn to recognize AC and DC drive and motor hardware and functions through example drive applications.This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeable about the following tasks:• Recognize AC and DC Motor Hardware• Recognize AC and DC Drive Hardware• Monitor a Drive Using a HIM• Recognize Line Protection and Filtering Device Hardware and Functions• Recognize AC and DC Motor Braking Methods• Test a Drive Using Electrical Measuring Tools• Preform Pre-Power and Power-On Checks• Select a Drive for Basic Applications
Prerequisites• Understanding of basic electrical and electronic concepts
Prerequisites continued• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Intended AudienceIndividuals who are unfamiliar with the control of AC and DC motors and drivesshould complete this web-based training.
Related ProductsAC and DC Motor and Drive Glossary ABT-D100-TSG10
Difficulty Level Beginner
PLC Fundamentals
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of important PLC principles and concepts. Students will understand how to connect to PLC hardware and how they function in various control systems. Students will also study the various programming conventions, as well as practical issues aboutautomation controls and components.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following topics and tasks:• What is a PLC? • Comparison Instructions• PLC Hardware • Math Instructions• PLC Numbering Systems • Sequencing Instructions• How is a PLC Structured • Specialty Instructions• How to Program a PLC • Practical Issues• Devices Connected to a PLC • Resources• How to Use Timers • Product Support• How to Use Counters• Data Handling Instructions
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this web-based training course.
Intended AudienceIndividuals who need to understand the basics of programmable logic controllersshould complete this web-based training.
Related ProductsRSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide ABT-1785-TSJ53PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1785-DRG70
Difficulty Level Beginner
ePass/WBT1PACK
20 Hours
ePass/WBT1PACK
20 Hours
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 137
RSView ME Software – Applications and Displays
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to create and configure a human-machine interface (HMI) application. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSView Machine Edition (ME) software. Students will learn how to create displays and tags, configure application settings, and import and export tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example RSView ME applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following tasks:• Use the Application Explorer • Use HMI Tags• Create a New Display • Import and Export the Tag Database• Use the Startup Editor• Use Project Settings• Configure Security Options• Use Direct-Reference Tags• Create New HMI Tags
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Knowledge of common HMI and controller terms and operation is suggested.
Intended AudienceIndividuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSView ME softwareshould complete this web-based training.
Related ProductsRSView32 Procedures Guide ABT-9301-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Intermediate
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
RSView ME Software – Drawing Objects
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively add and animate basic drawing objects for graphic displays. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSView Machine Edition (ME) software. Students will learn how to add objects from the graphics library, arrange objects, and animate objects through step-by-step demonstrations. Students willlearn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example RSView ME applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following tasks:• Understand Drawing Objects• Understand Object Properties• Arrange Objects• Add Objects from the Graphic Library• Use the Object Explorer• Animate Drawing Objects
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Knowledge of common HMI and controller terms and operation is suggested.• Completion of the RSView ME Software – Applications and Displays web-based
training course or equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended.
Intended AudienceIndividuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSView ME softwareshould complete this web-based training.
Related ProductsRSView32 Procedures Guide ABT-9301-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Intermediate
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training138
RSView ME Software – Interactive Objects
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure interactive objects for graphic displays. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSView Machine Edition (ME) software.Students will learn how to create and configure interactive objects, parameter files, and tag placeholders through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will also learnabout the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example RSView ME applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following tasks:• Create Pushbuttons, and Display Objects• Create Control List Selectors, Gauges, and Graph Objects• Create Display Navigation Objects• Create Local Message Displays• Add Advanced Features to Interactive Objects• Create Parameter Files and Tag Placeholders• Test Displays and Applications
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Knowledge of common HMI and controller terms and operation is suggested.
Prerequisites continued• Completion of the following web-based training courses or equivalent experience
with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:- RSView ME Software – Applications and Displays- RSView ME Software – Drawing Objects
Intended AudienceIndividuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSView ME softwareshould complete this web-based training.
Related ProductsRSView32 Procedures Guide ABT-9301-TSJ50
Difficulty Level Intermediate
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
RSLogix 500 Software – Offline Programming
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required for programming an RSLogix 500 project. Specifically, this course provides information onhow to navigate through the RSLogix 500 software, create a new RSLogix 500 project, and enter ladder logic in a project. Helpful animations, background information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools. Students will also have the opportunity to practiceperforming software tasks through interactive simulations. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following tasks:• Navigate through the RSLogix 500 Software• Configure the Display• Create a New Project• Create Program and Data Files• Configure I/O Modules in a Project• Enter Ladder Logic• Copy, Paste, and Move Rungs
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Intended AudienceIndividuals responsible for programming projects using RSLogix 500 software andwho are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 softwareshould complete this web-based training.
Related ProductsRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software 9393-EGLX500SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 139
RSLogix 500 Software – Online Monitoring
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required for monitoring an RSLogix 500 project online. Specifically, this course provides information on how to configure RSLinx communications, go online with the SLC 500 processor, edit ladder logic online, and configure and use data monitoring tools.Helpful animations, background information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools. Students will alsohave the opportunity to practice performing software tasks through interactive simulations. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following tasks:• Configure Communications• Transfer an RSLogix 500 Project File• Edit Ladder Logic Online• Monitor Data• Force Inputs and Outputs
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the following web-based training course or equivalent
experience with RSLogix 500 software is recommended:- RSLogix 500 Software – Offline Programming
Intended AudienceIndividuals responsible for monitoring RSLogix 500 projects and who are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 software should complete this web-based training.
Related ProductsRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software 9393-EGLX500SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
RSLogix 500 Software – Documenting and Searching
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required for documenting and searching an RSLogix 500 project. Specifically, this course provides information on how to use RSLogix 500 backup utilities, symbols, comments, database tools, and search functions. Helpful animations, background information, and links to other reference materials provide students with a variety of knowledge and learning tools. Students will also have the opportunity to practiceperforming software tasks through interactive simulations. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following tasks:• Use Backup Utilities • Print Reports• Add Symbols and Address Descriptions • Search a Project• Add Instruction, Rung Comments, and Page Titles• Use Database Tools• Import and Export a Database
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the following web-based training courses or equivalent experience
with RSLogix 500 software is recommended:- RSLogix 500 Software – Offline Programming- RSLogix 500 Software – Online Monitoring
Intended AudienceIndividuals responsible for programming projects using RSLogix 500 software andwho are interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 500 softwareshould complete this web-based training.
Related ProductsRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52Procedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 Software 9393-EGLX500SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
ComingSoon!
ComingSoon!
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training140
RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure automation control projects. This course is available inboth computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn howto install and navigate through the software, create and configure a new project, and produce and consume tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Students willalso learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example automation control applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following tasks:• Install RSLogix 5000 Software • Produce and Consume Tags• Configure the Display • Export and Import Tags• Navigate through the Software• Create and Manage Project Files• Configure a Controller• Organize Tasks, Programs, and Routines• Configure a Local I/O Module
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Intended AudienceIndividuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 softwareshould complete this web-based training.
Related ProductsLogix5000 System Glossary ABT-1756-TSG10RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1756-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively create and configure automation control projects. This course is available inboth computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn howto install and navigate through the software, create and configure a new project, and produce and consume tags through step-by-step demonstrations. Through thedemonstrations, students will also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example automation control applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following tasks:• Enter and Edit Ladder Logic Elements• Configure Ladder Logic Display Options• Enter and Edit Function Block Diagrams• Configure Function Block Diagram Display Options• Enter and Edit Structured Text• Configure the Structured Text Display• Verify Project Components• Search and Replace Text
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment
Prerequisites continued• Completion of the RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration web-based
training course or equivalent experience with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended
Intended AudienceIndividuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 softwareshould complete this web-based training.
Related ProductsLogix5000 System Glossary ABT-1756-TSG10RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSG50Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1756-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 141
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 HoursRSLogix 5000 Software – Motion
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively program motion control applications. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how toconfigure servo modules, program motion instructions, and test and tune axes through step-by-step demonstrations. Students will also learn about the various settingsand options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example motion applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following tasks:• Configure the Servo Modules• Configure the Controller• Add and Configure a SERCOS Servo Drive Axis• Add and Configure an Analog Servo Drive Axis• Understand the Motion Instruction Tag Structure• Compare Immediate and Synchronous Instructions• Test and Tune an Axis• Use Motion Direct CommandsPrerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the following web-based training courses or equivalent experience
with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:- RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration- RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming- RSLogix 5000 Software – Online Monitoring
Intended AudienceIndividuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 motion control software should complete this web-based training.
Related ProductsLogix5000 System Glossary ABT-1756-TSG10RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Motion Control Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ52
Difficulty Level Advanced
RSLogix 5000 Software – Online Monitoring
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course teaches the core tasks required to effectively monitor and edit industrial control projects. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats and is part of a series of e-Learning courses designed to teach RSLogix 5000 software. Students will learn how toestablish communications, monitor the status of a project, program ladder logic online, and identify and correct faults through step-by-step demonstrations. Studentswill also learn about the various settings and options in the software and see how to perform the required tasks for example automation control applications.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following tasks:• Establish Communications • Program Ladder Logic Online• Monitor Status • Print a Function Block Diagram• Print a Ladder Logic Routine• Identify and Correct Faults
Prerequisites• Experience operating a computer within a Microsoft Windows environment• Completion of the following web-based training courses or equivalent
experience with RSLogix 5000 software is recommended:- RSLogix 5000 Software – Project Configuration- RSLogix 5000 Software – Offline Programming
Intended AudienceIndividuals interested in the features and capabilities of RSLogix 5000 softwareshould complete this web-based training.
Related ProductsLogix5000 System Glossary ABT-1756-TSG10RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50ControlLogix and RSLogix5000 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1756-TSJ20Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1756-DRG70
Difficulty Level Intermediate
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training142
Industrial ElectricalePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
5 Hours
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of the most important electrical concepts. Students will understand basic physics lawsas they apply to electricity and basic electrical circuits. Students will also study the various components of electrical systems and how they function and interact with each other.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following topics:• Electrical Fundamentals• Circuit Fundamentals• Circuit Analysis• Basic Magnetism• Circuit Components• Electrical Testers• Schematics
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this web-based training course.
Intended AudienceIndividuals who need to understand basic electrical concepts should complete thisweb-based training.
Difficulty Level Beginner
Industrial MechanicalePass/WBT1PACK
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of the most important mechanical concepts. Students will understand basic physicslaws as they apply to mechanical power and the systems in which they can be used. Students will also study the various components of mechanical systems and how they function and interact with each other.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following topics:• Basic Physics• Linear Actuators• Clutches• Brakes• Clutch/Brake Combinations• Bearings• Gears• Drives• Couplings
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this web-based training course.
Intended AudienceIndividuals who need to understand basic mechanical concepts should completethis web-based training.
Difficulty Level Beginner
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 143
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
ePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
Industrial Hydraulics
Industrial Pneumatics
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of the most important hydraulic concepts. Students will understand basic physics lawsas they apply to hydraulic power and the systems in which they can be used. Students will also study the various components of hydraulic systems and how theyfunction and interact with each other. This course is available in both computer-based and web-based delivery formats.
Course PurposeThis interactive, self-paced, training course delivers a broad-based understanding of the most important pneumatic concepts. Students will understand basic physicslaws as they apply to pneumatics, as well as understand schematics and system design. Students will also study the various components of pneumatic systems and how they function and interact with each other.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following topics:• Basic Hydraulic Physics • Fluid Conditioning• Pumps • Check Valves• Actuators • Accessory Components• Pressure Control • Fluid Conductors• Directional Control • Schematics• Flow Control Valves • Basic System Design• Modular Control Valves
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following topics:• Electrical Physics • Air Line Conductors• Compressors • Vacuum• Air Dryers • Schematics• Air Preparation• Air Distribution• Actuators• Directional Control Valves• Accessories
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this web-based training course.
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this web-based training course.
Intended AudienceIndividuals who need to understand basic hydraulic concepts should complete thisweb-based training.
Intended AudienceIndividuals who need to understand basic pneumatic concepts should completethis web-based training.
Difficulty Level Beginner
Difficulty Level Beginner
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training144
Mobile ElectricalePass/WBT1PACK
5 Hours
Course PurposeThis course delivers an interactive training experience to assist students in working with electrical systems of mobile equipment. Students will learn the various physicslaws related to electric power, as well as the electric components and circuits associated with these systems.
Intended AudienceIndividuals who need a better understanding of mobile electrical equipment shouldcomplete this web-based training.
Difficulty Level Beginner
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this web-based training course.
5 HoursMobile Hydraulics
ePass/WBT1PACK
Course PurposeThis course delivers an interactive training experience covering the concepts needed to understand and work with the hydraulic systems of mobile equipment. Studentswill learn various physics laws related to hydraulic power, as well as the hydraulic components and circuits associated with these systems. Students will study thebasics of hydrostatic transmissions, as well as valves and maintenance systems common to almost all combustion engine vehicles. Students will also study the symbolsand language of hydraulic schematics, helping them better understand their systems.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following topics:• Fluid Power Physics • Fluid Conditioning• Pumps • Check Valves• Actuators • Accessory Components• Hydraulic Transmissions • Fluid Conductors• Pressure Control • Schematics• Directional Control Valves• Flow Control Valves• Modular Control Valves
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this web-based training course.
Intended AudienceIndividuals who need a better understanding of mobile hydraulics equipmentshould complete this web-based training.
Difficulty Level Beginner
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this web-based training course, students will be knowledgeableabout the following topics:• Electrical Fundamentals• Circuit Fundamentals• Circuit Analysis• Basic Magnetism• Circuit Components • Electrical Testers• Charging and Starting Systems
Workstations
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training146
Training Workstations
Training workstations are the ideal tool toreinforce and practice skills, train newemployees, and ease the transition fromone technology to another in a plant.
As a Training Tool. . .
Workstations can provide users with hands-on maintenance, troubleshooting,and programming experience using actualequipment. Supplemental lab books can beprovided based on request.
As a Maintenance Tool. . .
Workstations can be used to check modulesand practice troubleshooting.
As a Engineering Tool. . .
Workstations can provide users with operationalequipment for functions, such as application simulations and prototypes.
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 147
As a Post-Training Refresher Tool. . .
Workstations can be used to practice, sustain, andenhance individuals’ skills and knowledge after completing Rockwell Automation trainingcourses.
Availability and Customization
If you are looking for hands-on,self-paced instruction, RockwellAutomation workstations are available for purchase within a variety of technologies. Workstations can also becustom-designed and configured to meet your specific needs.
New!
Training workstations can now be added toRockwell Automation Parts ManagementAgreements, thereby giving you greater flexibilityand value. Ask your local Allen-Bradley Distributoror Rockwell Automation Sales and Support officefor more details.
Check Out These New Workstations!
ControlLogix Motion Workstation (No Controller)ABT-TDCLX1NP
ControlLogix Workstation (No Motion)ABT-TDCLX3
EtherNet/IP WorkstationABT-TDENETIP
GuardLogix Controller WorkstationABT-TDGRDLX1
GuardPLC WorkstationABT-TDGRDPLC1
Integrated Architecture WorkstationABT-TDIA
Smart Instrumentation WorkstationABT-TDSMART
XM WorkstationABT-TDXM-VIB
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training148
Catalog #: ABT-TD1336T1336 FORCE AC Drive Workstation
Dimensions• Width - 36 inches (92 cm)• Height - 60 inches (153 cm)• Depth - 28 inches (72 cm)• Weight - 650 lbs (295 Kg)
CompatibilityIMPORTANT: The Drive Troubleshooting Box is not compatible witha 1336 FORCE AC drive that uses a PLC processor adapter.
Related Courses• CCA101 • CCA124 • CCA134
Configuration• 7.5-HP 1336 FORCE AC drive
- Standard adapter- 115V AC control interface- DH+ adapter- English firmware
• 120V AC operation• Drive operator panel
- Program digital output, run, fault, and alarm indicators- User-configurable digital inputs- External fault input- Auxiliary 120V AC outlet- 0-10V and 4-20mA speed reference- Start, stop, enable auxiliary, speed select, and speed inputs- E-stop pushbutton
• Enhanced hand-held programming terminal• Graphic programming terminal• PLC control system
- PLC-5/40 processor - 4-slot I/O chassis- 2 1771-SIM I/O modules - 1-slot power supply
• 3-HP Reliance Electric AC motor with encoder feedback
• Hand brake load• SCANport adapters
- Serial communications adapter- Single-point remote I/O adapter- Remote I/O communications interface- Port replicator
• SCE (Saginaw Control and Engineering) electrical enclosure on wheels
1336 IMPACT AC Drive Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TD1336E
Dimensions• Width - 36 inches (92 cm)• Height - 60 inches (153 cm)• Depth - 28 inches (72 cm)• Weight - 650 lbs (295 Kg)
Related Courses• CCA101 • CCA132 • CCA133 • CCA135 • CCA138
Configuration• 7.5-HP 1336 IMPACT AC drive
- Remote I/O communications- 115V AC control interface- Encoder feedback
• 120V AC operation• Drive operator panel
- At-speed, run, fault, and alarm indicators- User-configurable digital inputs- Pulse and 4-20mA speed reference- Start, stop, enable auxiliary, speed select, and speed inputs- Intelligent output- E-stop pushbutton- Auxiliary 120V AC outlet
• 2 hand-held programming terminals• PLC control system
- PLC-5/40 processor- 2 1771-SIM I/O modules- 4-slot I/O chassis- 1-slot power supply
• SCANport adapters- Port replicator- Serial communications adapter
• 3-HP Reliance Electric AC motor withencoder feedback
• Hand brake load• SCE (Saginaw Control and Engineering)
electrical enclosure on wheels
Lead Time = 8 weeks
Lead Time = 8 weeks
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 149
1336 PLUS II AC Drive Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TD1336F
• SCANport adapters- Single-point remote I/O
communications adapter- Serial communications adapter- Port replicator
• SCE (Saginaw Control and Engineering)electrical enclosure on wheels
Dimensions• Width - 36 inches (92 cm)• Height - 60 inches (153 cm)• Depth - 28 inches (72 cm)• Weight - 650 lbs (295 Kg)
Related Courses• CCA101 • CCA137
Configuration• 7.5-HP 1336 PLUS II AC drive, including encoder feedback interface• 120V AC operation• Drive operator panel
- User-configurable digital inputs- Analog option modules- 4 programmable digital outputs- 0-10V and 4-20mA speed reference- Start, stop, enable auxiliary, speed select, and 1336
PLUS II speed inputs- E-stop pushbutton
• Hand-held programming terminal• PLC control system
- PLC-5/40 processor- 2 1771-SIM I/O modules- 4-slot I/O chassis- 1-slot power supply
• 3-HP Reliance Electric AC motor with encoder feedback• Hand brake load
Kinetix 6000 Servo Drive Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TD20941 (120V AC)
Dimensions• Width - 25 inches (64 cm)• Height - 19 inches (48 cm)• Depth - 10 inches (25 cm)• Weight - 70 lbs (32 Kg)
Related Courses• CCN142 • CCN190 • CCN200
Configuration• 2-axis power rail• 120V AC operation• Integrated axis module• MP-Series motors• Fiber optic communication option• Illuminated mushroom E-stop pushbutton• Integral surge suppression• Auxiliary encoder• Cable package
- Universal feedback cable- Universal motor power cable- Lo-profile I/O connector kit- Lo-profile feedback connector kit- Lo-profile auxiliary feedback connector kit
• Hardened electrical enclosure with wheels and carrying handle
CompatibilityThe Kinetix 6000 Servo Drive Workstation can be used with the ControlLogix Motion workstation (ABT-TDCLX1 plus 1756-M08SE module) and fiber-optic cables.
Lead Time = 8 weeks
Lead Time = 6 weeks
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training150
PowerFlex 700 Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDPF700
Dimensions (Drive)• Width - 25 inches (64 cm)• Height - 20 inches (51cm)• Depth - 17 inches (43 cm)• Weight - 57 lbs (26 Kg))
Dimensions (Motor)• Width - 25 inches (64 cm)• Height - 20 inches (51 cm)• Depth - 12 inches (30 cm)• Weight - 67 lbs (30 Kg)
Related Courses• CCA161 • CCA162 • CCA163 • CCA164
Configuration• 1 HP PowerFlex 700 AC drive• Remote I/O communications• 120V AC operation• Drive operator panel that includes:
- Programmable digital output- User-configurable digital inputs- 0-10V speed reference- 0-10V analog output
• Digital programming terminal• 1 HP AC motor with encoder feedback• Fault simulation switches• User-accessible wiring terminals
CompatibilityThe PowerFlex 700 Workstation can be used with the Fan Demo Unit(ABT-TDPF700-FAN).
Smart Instrumentation Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDSMART
DimensionsFieldbus Unit• Width - 19 inches (48 cm)• Height - 7 inches (18 cm)• Depth - 14 inches (36 cm)
HART Unit• Width - 22 inches (56 cm)• Height - 9 inches (23 cm)• Depth - 15 inches (38 cm)
Configuration• Fieldbus Unit
- 1 Smart temperature transmitter- 1 RTD simulator kit
• HART unit- 1 4-slot chassis- 1 power supply- 1 processor- 1 communication module- 1 ControlLogix HART module- 1 pressure bulb- 1 hose- 1 hose to 1/4 inch pipe fitting- 1 Hirschmann Spider
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Photo Not Available
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 151
Catalog #: ABT-TDPF700FANFan Demo Unit
Dimensions• Width - 14 inches (36 cm)• Height - 20 inches (51 cm)• Depth -15 inches (38 cm)• Weight - 25 lbs (11 Kg))
Related Courses• CCA161 • CCA162 • CCA163 • CCA164
Configuration• Vertical mounted fan and 230V AC motor• Manual pressure damper• Upstream air pressure transducer• Motor connector and cable• I/O connector and cable• AC power cord• 2-amp fuse• Internal power transformer (230V AC output)• Industrial hardened electrical enclosure with handle
CompatibilityThe Fan Demo can be used with the PowerFlex 700 Workstation(ABT-TDPF700).
Catalog #: ABT-TD20981 (120V AC)Ultra 3000 Servo Drive Workstation
Dimensions• Width - 22 inches (56 cm)• Height - 9 inches (23 cm)• Depth - 14 inches (36 cm)• Weight - 33 lbs (15 Kg)
Related Courses• CCN130 • CCN191-LD
Configuration• MPL-A310P-MK22AA drive motor• External encoder• 120V AC operation• UltraWare programming software• Complete cable package
- Drive cable- Feedback cable- Power cable- Serial cable
• Industrial hardened electrical enclosure with handle
CompatibilityThe Ultra 3000 Servo Drive Workstation can be used with the ControlLogix Motion workstation (ABT-TDCLX1 plus 1756-M08SE module) and fiber-optic cables.
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Lead Time = 6 weeks
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training152
1746 I/O Rack System Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDSLC1 (120V AC)Catalog #: ABT-TDSLC2 (220V AC)
• Universal I/O Simulator Workstation- Catalog Number ABT-TDUIO1- Configuration B - 1 remote I/O
adapter, 1 remote I/O scanner, 1 four-slot I/O chassis, 1 analog combination I/O module, 1 potentiometer, and 1 voltmeter 0-10V DC
IImmppoorrttaanntt:: For I/O simulation, the 1746 I/O Rack System Workstation must be used with the Universal I/O Simulator Workstation (ABT-TDUIO1).
CompatibilityThe 1746 I/O Rack System Workstation can be used with the Universal I/O Simulator (ABT-TDUIO1).
Dimensions• Width - 25 inches (64 cm)• Height - 21 inches (53 cm)• Depth - 10 inches (25 cm)• Weight - 50 lbs (23 Kg)
Related Courses• CCP122 • CCPS41 • CCPS42 • CCPS43 • CCPS45 • CCPS65
Configuration• SLC 5/04 processor• 10-slot I/O chassis• Power supply (5A)• Digital I/O modules
- 3 DC input modules (16 pt.) - sink 10-30V DC- 3 DC output modules (16 pt.) - source 10-50V DC
• Intelligent I/O modules- 2 analog combination modules
• Advanced interface converter• Bulletin 800T E-stop pushbutton• Covered empty chassis slot• Hard-shell shipping case• Auxiliary AC power outlets
Accessories (optional - not included with standard workstation)• 1746 PID Simulation Kit
- Configuration - 1 ring terminal and 1 R-C circuit- Catalog Number - ABT-TDSLCPID- Estimated Lead Time - 2 weeks
• SLC Remote I/O Kit- Configuration A - 1 RIO adapter and 1 RIO scanner
1771 I/O Rack System Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDPLC1 (120V AC)Catalog #: ABT-TDPLC2 (220V AC)
Dimensions• Width - 30 inches (76 cm)• Height - 21 inches (53 cm)• Depth - 13 inches (33 cm)• Weight - 70 lbs (32 Kg)
Related Courses• CCP122 • CCP310-LD • CCP409• CCP410 • CCP411 • CCP412• CCPS65
Configuration• PLC-5/40 processor• 12-slot I/O chassis• Single-slot power supply• Digital I/O modules
- 3 high-density 10-30V DC input modules- 3 high-density 10-60V DC output modules
• Intelligent I/O modules- 1 analog input module- 1 analog output module
• 3 empty chassis slots• Hard-shell shipping case
CompatibilityThe 1771 I/O Rack System Workstation can be used with theUniversal I/O Simulator (ABT-TDUIO1).
IImmppoorrttaanntt:: For I/O simulation, the 1771 I/O Rack System Workstation must be used with the Universal I/O Simulator Workstation (ABT-TDUIO1).
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Lead Time = 6 weeks
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 153
Advanced Communications Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDCLXCOM
DimensionsDeviceNet Unit• Width - 32 inches (81 cm)• Height - 24 inches (61cm)• Depth - 14 inches (36 cm)• Weight - 85 lbs (39 Kg)
ControlNet Unit• Width - 33 inches (84 cm)• Height - 22 inches (56 cm)• Depth - 14 inches (36 cm)• Weight - 95 lbs (43 Kg)
Configuration• ControlNet box
- PanelView 600 ControlNet terminal- 4-slot 1771 I/O chassis- 1771 I/O power supply- PLC-5/40C processor- 16-bit DC output module- Analog output module- LED display- 1771 simulator module- Hard-shell shipping case
• DeviceNet box- PanelView 600 DeviceNet terminal- Photo switch- ArmorBlock I/O- RediSTATION operator interface- Bulletin 160 drive with motor- 1756-DNB (DeviceNet bridge) module- Hard-shell shipping case
CompatibilityThe Advanced Communications workstation can be used with theControlLogix Motion Workstation (ABT-TDCLX1 plus 1756-M08SE module).
ControlNet Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDCNET1
DimensionsPLC-5 Unit• Width - 32 inches (81 cm)• Height - 26 inches (66 cm)• Depth - 16 inches (41 cm)• Weight - 108 lbs (49 Kg)ControlLogix Unit• Width - 26 inches (66 cm)• Weight - 19 inches (48 cm)• Depth - 24 inches (61 cm)• Weight - 93 lbs (42 Kg)
Related Courses• CCP170 • CCP172
Configuration• Control hardware
- 1 1771 I/O chassis, 4-slot- 1 1771 DC input module- 1 1771 slot power supply- 1 1771 SIM module- 1 1771 high-speed counter module- 1 ControlNet PLC-5 processor- 1 1756 I/O chassis, 4-slot- 1 1756 rack power supply- 1 1756 DC input module- 1 1756 ControlNet bridge module- 1 ControlLogix controller
• ControlNet cabling system• Flex I/O system
- 2 adapters- 2 analog I/O modules- 6 bases- 2 DC output modules
• Operator interface panel- 8 illuminated pushbuttons- 8 selector switches- 1 potentiometer- 2 DC volt meters
• 2 workstation enclosures
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Lead Time = 6 weeks
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training154
DeviceNet Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDDNET1
DimensionsControlLogix/PanelView Unit• Width - 30 inches (76 cm)• Height - 27 inches (69 cm)• Depth - 17 inches (43 cm)• Weight - 95 lbs (43 Kg)
Related Courses• CCP164
DimensionsSLC 500 Unit• Width - 30 inches (76 cm)• Height - 27 inches (69 cm)• Depth - 17 inches (43 cm)• Weight - 95 lbs (43 Kg)
Configuration• 2 terminators• 3 T-port taps• 2 open QuikLink taps• 2 micro QuikLink taps• 4 DeviceNet drop lines• DeviceNet thick cable trunk line• DeviceNet flat media• DeviceNet pushbutton station• DeviceNet photoeye• ArmorBlock MaXum input module• ArmorBlock MaXum base• CompactBlock I/O• 3 illuminated pushbuttons• DeviceNet proximity sensor• DeviceNet PanelView 600 terminal• Reflector• Motor control system
- 1 DeviceNet Starter Auxiliary- 1 Contactor- 1 AC motor
• Drive system- 1 Bulletin 160 sub-micro drive- 1 Bulletin 160 DeviceNet adapter- 1 E3 overload relay- 1 AC motor
• SLC control system- 1 SLC 4-slot chassis- 1 SLC power supply- 1 SLC 5/04 processor- 1 SLC DeviceNet scanner
EtherNet/IP Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDENETIP
Dimensions• Width - 30 inches (76 cm)• Height - 21 inches (53 cm)• Depth - 13 inches (33 cm)• Weight - 45 lbs (20 kg)
Related Courses• CCP174
Configuration• 7-slot ControlLogix chassis with the following modules:
- Controller- EtherNet/IP bridge module- EtherNet/IP web server module- DeviceNet scanner- Digital input module- Digital output module
• ControlLogix power supply• CompactLogix chassis with the following modules:
- 1769-L32E controller- 1769 digital input module- 1769 digital output module
• 1794-AENT EtherNet/IP adapter module with a four channel non-isolated analog output module
• PanelView Plus 600 terminal• Managed switch• 18 dual discrete inputs/outputs• 4 selector switches• 1 analog output meter• 1 photoeye• Hard-shell shipping case
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Lead Time = 8 weeks
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 155
ControlLogix Workstation - No Motion (7-Slot chassis) Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX2
Dimensions• Width - 20 inches (51 cm)• Height - 16 inches (41 cm)• Depth - 9 inches (23 cm)• Weight - 90 lbs (41 Kg)
Related Courses• CCP143 • CCP146 • CCP151 • CCP152 • CCP153• CCP154-LD • CCP710 • CCP711 • CCCL21
Configuration• Network hardware
- 1 ControlNet bridge module- 1 ControlNet interface- 2 ControlNet taps- 2 terminators
• Control hardware- 1 7-slot I/O chassis- 1 1756 system power supply- 2 ControlLogix processor modules- 1 DC input module- 1 DC output module- 1 analog input module- 1 analog output module
• Programming cable• Operator interface panel
- 12 illuminated pushbuttons- 2 potentiometers- 2 analog voltmeters
CompatibilityThe ControlLogix Workstation can be usedwith the Advanced CommunicationsWorkstation (ABT-TDCLXCOM).
ControlLogix Motion Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX1
Dimensions• Width - 20 inches (51 cm)• Height - 16 inches (41 cm)• Depth - 9 inches (23 cm)• Weight - 90 lbs (41 Kg))
Related Courses• CCP143 • CCP146 • CCP151 • CCP152 • CCP153 • CCP154-LD • CCP710 • CCP711• CCCL21 • CCN142 • CCN190-LD • CCN200
Configuration• Network hardware
- 1 ControlNet bridge module- 1 DH+/remote I/O communications module- 1 ControlNet interface- 1 DH+ interface- 2 ControlNet taps- 2 terminators
• Control hardware- 1 10-slot I/O chassis- 1 1756 system power supply- 2 ControlLogix processor modules- 1 DC input module- 1 DC output module- 1 analog input module- 1 analog output module
• Programming cable• Motion control hardware
- 2 NEMA wiring arms- 4 IEC wiring arms- 1 motion module- 2 Ultra 100 servo drives
- 2 Y-series motors- 2 drive interfaces
• Operator interface panel- 12 illuminated pushbuttons- 2 potentiometers- 2 analog voltmeters
CompatibilityThe ControlLogix Motion Workstation canbe used with the Advanced CommunicationsWorkstation (ABT-TDCLXCOM).
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Lead Time = 6 weeks
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training156
ControlLogix Motion Workstation - No Controller Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX1NP
Dimensions• Width - 20 inches (51 cm)• Height - 16 inches (41 cm)• Depth - 9 inches (23 cm)• Weight - 90 lbs (41 Kg))
Configuration• Network hardware
- 1 ControlNet bridge module- 1 DH+/remote I/O communications module- 1 ControlNet interface- 1 DH+ interface- 2 ControlNet taps- 2 terminators
• Control hardware- 1 10-slot I/O chassis- 1 1756 system power supply- 1 DC input module- 1 DC output module- 1 analog input module- 1 analog output module
• Programming cable• Motion control hardware
- 2 NEMA wiring arms- 4 IEC wiring arms- 1 motion module- 2 Ultra 100 servo drives- 2 Y-series motors- 2 drive interfaces
• Operator interface panel- 12 illuminated pushbuttons- 2 potentiometers- 2 analog voltmeters
Photo Not Available
ControlLogix Workstation - No Motion (10-Slot chassis) Catalog #: ABT-TDCLX3
Dimensions• Width - 20 inches (51 cm)• Height - 16 inches (41 cm)• Depth - 9 inches (23 cm)• Weight - 70 lbs (33 Kg))
Configuration• Network hardware
- 1 EtherNet module- 1 ControlNet bridge module- 1 ControlNet interface- 2 ControlNet taps- 2 terminators
• Control hardware- 1 10-slot I/O chassis- 1 1756 system power supply- 2 ControlLogix processor modules- 1 DC input module- 1 DC output module- 1 analog input module- 1 analog output module
• Programming cable• Operator interface panel
- 12 illuminated pushbuttons- 2 potentiometers- 2 analog voltmeters
* This workstation includes a 10-slot I/O chassis and offers moreflexibility and expandability.
Photo Not Available
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Lead Time = 6 weeks
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 157
GuardLogix Controller Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDGRDLX1
Related Courses• SAF-LOG101 • SAF-LOG102
Configuration• GuardLogix primary controller• GuardLogix safety partner• 7-slot ControlLogix chassis• ControlLogix power supply• 8 dual discrete inputs/outputs• CompactBlock I/O safety modules:
- 12 fail-safe inputs, 4 configurable standard semiconductor outputs (test outputs)
- 8 fail-safe inputs, 8 fail-safe solid-state outputs, 4 configurable standard semiconductor outputs (test outputs)
• Communication modules:- EtherNet/IP bridge module- DeviceNet bridge module
• Light curtain• Internal DeviceNet power supply (24 V DC)• E-Stop pushbutton• Patch connectors
Dimensions• Width - 30 inches (76 cm)• Height - 20 inches (51 cm)• Depth - 12 inches (30 cm)• Weight - 58 lbs (27 Kg)
GuardPLC Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDGRDPLC1
Dimensions• Width: 19 inches (48 cm)• Height: 15 inches (38 cm)• Depth: 8 inches (20 cm)• Weight: 20 lbs (9 kg)
Related Courses• SAF-PLC101 • SAF-PLC102• SAF-PLC103
Configuration• GuardPLC 1600 controller• Distributed I/O expansion module• Power switch• 120 V / 220 V plug receptacle• E-Stop pushbutton• 6 dual discrete inputs/outputs• Patch connectors• Hard-shell shipping case
Lead Time = 8 weeks
Lead Time = 8 weeks
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training158
Catalog #: ABT-TDPV1000TC01PanelView 1000 Workstation
Dimensions• Width - 17 inches (43 cm)• Height - 12 inches (30 cm)• Depth - 5 inches (13 cm)• Weight - 9 lbs (4 Kg)
Related Courses• CCP196
Configuration• PanelView 1000 terminal (2711-T10C8)• Keypad and touch operation• Data Highway Plus interface• Serial interface cable• Hard-shell shipping case
CompatibilityThe PanelView 1000 Workstation can be used with the followingworkstations:• ControlLogix (ABT-TDCLX1 or ABT-TDCLX2)• 1746 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDSLC1)• 1771 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDPLC1)
PanelView 600 Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDPV600TCO1
Dimensions• Width - 12 inches (30 cm)• Height - 8 inches (20 cm)• Depth - 5 inches (13 cm)• Weight - 5 lbs (2 Kg)
Related Courses• CCP196 • CCPS45
Configuration• PanelView 600 terminal• Keypad operation and touch operation• Data Highway Plus• Serial interface cable• Hard-shell shipping case (capacity to hold two
PanelView 600 terminals)
CompatibilityThe PanelView 600 Workstation can be used with the followingworkstations:• ControlLogix (ABT-TDCLX1 or ABT-TDCLX2)• 1746 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDSLC1)• 1771 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDPLC1)
Lead Time = 4 weeks
Lead Time = 4 weeks
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 159
Integrated Architecture Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDIA
DimensionsBox 1• Width: 22 inches (56 cm)• Height: 31 inches (79 cm)• Depth: 12 inches (30 cm)• Weight: 70 lbs (32 Kg)Box 2• Width: 21 inches (53 cm)• Height: 29 inches (74 cm)• Depth: 12 inches (30 cm)• Weight: 35 lbs (16 Kg)
Related Courses• CIA101
Configuration• 0.5-HP PowerFlex 40 AC drive• Network hardware
- 1 ControlNet-to-DeviceNet linking device- 1 ControlNet Flex I/O adapter module- 1 NETGEAR 5-port EtherNet switch- 1 RightSight photoeye- 1 tower light
• ControlLogix hardware- 1 10-slot I/O chassis- 1 1756 system power supply- 2 ControlLogix processor modules- 1 DC input module- 1 DC output module- 1 analog input module- 1 analog output module- 1 ControlNet bridge module- 1 EtherNet/IP bridge module- 1 DeviceNet scanner module- 1 MO8SE SERCOS interface module
• Motion control hardware- 1 M08SE SERCOS interface module- 1 Kinetix integrated IAM drive- 2 ControlLogix processor modules- 1 DC input module- 2 DC output modules- 1 analog input module
• PanelView Plus 600 terminal
Catalog #: ABT-TDPVPLUSTC01PanelView Plus Workstation
Dimensions• Width - 13 inches (33 cm)• Height - 10 inches (25 cm)• Depth - 3 inches (8 cm)• Weight - 6 lbs (3 Kg)
Related Courses• CCV202 • CCV203
Configuration• PanelView Plus terminal keypad and touch operation
(2711-P-B10C6B1)• DH+, RIO, DH-485• Serial Interface cable• Hard-shell shipping case
CompatibilityThe PanelView Plus workstation can be used with the followingworkstations:• ControlLogix (ABT-TDCLX1 or ABT-TDCLX2)• 1746 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDSLC1)• 1771 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDPLC1)
Lead Time = 4 weeks
Lead Time = 8 weeks
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training160
Universal I/O Simulator Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDUIO1 (120V AC)Catalog #: ABT-TDUIO2 (240V AC)
Dimensions• Width - 25 inches (64 cm)• Height - 21 inches (53 cm)• Depth - 10 inches (25 cm)• Weight - 70 lbs (32 Kg)
Related Courses• CCP122 • CCP409 • CCP410 • CCP411 • CCP412 • CCPS41 • CCPS42 • CCPS43• CCPS45 • CCPS65
Configuration• Digital inputs
- 12 Bulletin 800A normally-open maintained pushbuttons- 3 Bulletin 800A normally-open momentary pushbuttons- 1 Bulletin 800A normally-closed momentary pushbutton
• Digital outputs- 16 Bulletin 800A push-to-test pilot lights
• Bulletin 800T E-stop pushbutton• Intelligent inputs
- 4 Bulletin 800T 10KW potentiometers• Intelligent outputs
- 2 DC analog meters (0-10V)- 2 DC digital bar graph meters (0-5V)
• BCD inputs- 1 four-digit BCD thumbwheel input switch (0-9)- 1 four-digit BCD thumbwheel input switch (0-F)
• BCD outputs- 2 four-digit BCD LED output displays
• Hard-shell shipping case
CompatibilityThe Universal I/O Simulator can be usedwith the following workstations:• 1746 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDSLC1)• 1771 I/O Rack System (ABT-TDPLC1)
XM Workstation Catalog #: ABT-TDXM-VIB
Dimensions• Width - 30 inches (76 cm)• Height - 21 inches (54 cm)• Depth - 11 inches (28 cm)• Weight - 41 lbs (19 Kg)
Related Courses• EK-ICM165
Configuration• PanelView 600 DeviceNet terminal• XM-500 DeviceNet to Ethernet Gateway• XM-120 2-Channel Standard Dynamic Module• XM-320 2-Channel Position Module• XM-440 4-Output Master Relay Module• LED display• Five signal generators • BNC connections • Toggle switches • Warning lights • Port connections for DeviceNet and Ethernet communications• Mini-USB connection on the XM-120, XM-320
and XM-440 modules• ATA class shipping case
Lead Time = 6 weeks
Lead Time = 8 weeks
Job Aids
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training162
Job Aids
Rockwell Automation recognizes that one of the keysto superior performance on-the-job is the ability tobecome efficient and highly effective using supportresources. Rockwell Automation award-winning jobaids provide essential job task information, therebyminimizing errors that can occur at themost inopportune moments. Jobaids provide immediate hardwareand software information when itis needed so production does notslow. Our job aids are written at alevel of detail to ensure that youare consistently using best practices. The right job aid canmake the difference between productive time and downtimeand between maximum performance and minimumoperation.
Standard Guides
Standard job aids are designed to assistindividuals with software and hardware jobtasks. While these tools are very good at coveringtasks associated with Rockwell Automation hardwarecomponents, they are not designed to take into consideration every possible custom system configuration or state.
Custom Guides
Custom guides are designed and developed to workwith plant-specific systems and applications.Common operator-related hardware and softwareerrors can be eliminated by using custom designedprocedures and guides. Rockwell Automation canassist you with the design and creation of the guidesyou need to achieve maximum efficiency and minimize operator-related errors. Contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or Rockwell Automationsales representative to discuss creating custom guidesfor your needs.
Job Aid Catalog #
AC and DC Motor and Drive Glossary ABT-D100-TSG10Logix5000 Systems Glossary ABT-1756-TSG10Motion Control Glossary ABT-M100-TSG10
Glossaries
Glossaries provide an alphabetized listing of commonterminology and definitions as it relates to a specifictechnology. Glossaries help users become more familiar with technical terms and concepts needed to understand a technology.
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 163
Procedures Guides
Procedures guides provide detailed step-by-step instructions on themost common software and hardware-related job tasksthat help users to program, configure,troubleshoot, and test Rockwell Automation control equipment.
Features• Step-by-step directions for job-specific tasks
• Best practices and standard guidelines• Tips on software-related shortcuts
and special features• Safety reminders and warnings
• Glossary of key software and hardware terms• Appendices of basic Microsoft Windows operations
Job Aid Catalog #
1395 Drive Installation Guide ABT-1395-TSH50ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide ABT-N200-TSJ50ControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide - Portuguese ABT-N200-TSJ50PTControlNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide - Spanish ABT-N200-TSJ50ESDeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide ABT-N100-TSJ50DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Procedures Guide - German ABT-N100-TSJ50DEDriveExplorer Procedures Guide ABT-D500-TSJ51DriveTools Procedures Guide ABT-D500-TSJ50DriveTools Procedures Guide - Dutch ABT-D500-TSJ50NLEtherNet/IP Procedures Guide ABT-N300-TSJ50GML and 1394 Procedures Guide ABT-4100-TSJ50GML Commander and 1394 Procedures Guide ABT-4100-TSJ51GML Commander and 1394 Procedures Guide - German ABT-4100-TSJ51DEGML Commander and 1394 Procedures Guide - Portuguese ABT-4100-TSJ51PTGML Commander and 1394 Procedures Guide - Spanish ABT-4100-TSJ51ESMicroLogix 1000 Procedures Guide ABT-1761-TSJ50PanelView 300/550/600/900/1000/1400and Panel Builder32 Procedures Guide ABT-2711-TSJ50PanelView 1000e/1200e/1400e andPanel Builder 1400e Configuration Procedures Guide ABT-2711E-TSJ50PLC-2 and 6200 Series Procedures Guide ABT-1772-TSJ80PLC-5 and 6200 Series Procedures Guide ABT-1785-TSJ50PLC-5 and 6200 Series Procedures Guide - Spanish ABT-1785-TSJ50ESPLC-5 and A.I. Series Procedures Guide ABT-1785-TSJ51PLC-5 and A.I. Series Procedures Guide - Spanish ABT-1785-TSJ51ESProcedures eGuide for RSLogix 500 9393-EGLX500ProcessLogix Configuration Procedures Guide ABT-1757-TSJ50
Job Aid Catalog #
ProcessLogix Operators Procedures Guide ABT-1757-TSJ51PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Procedures Guide ABT-20B-TSJ50RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide ABT-1785-TSJ53RSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide - French ABT-1785-TSJ53FRRSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide - Italian ABT-1785-TSJ53ITRSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide - Portuguese ABT-1785-TSJ53PTRSLogix 5 and PLC-5 Procedures Guide - Spanish ABT-1785-TSJ53ESRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ52RSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide - Dutch ABT-1747-TSJ52NLRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide - Portuguese ABT-1747-TSJ52PTRSLogix 500 and SLC 500 Procedures Guide - Spanish ABT-1747-TSJ52ESRSLogix 5000 and Logix5000Advanced Communications Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ51RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000Motion Control Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ52RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide ABT-1756-TSJ50RSLogix 5000 and Logix5000 Procedures Guide - Italian ABT-1756-TSJ50ITRSLogix Guard PLUS and Guard PLC Procedures Guide ABT-1753-TSJ50RSView32 Procedures Guide ABT-9301-TSJ50RSView ME and PanelView Plus Procedures Guide ABT-2711P-TSJ50RSView SE Procedures Guide (FactoryTalk View SE) ABT-9701SE-TSJ50SLC 500 and A.I. Series Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ51SLC 500 and APS Procedures Guide ABT-1747-TSJ50SoftLogix 5 Procedures Guide ABT-1789-TSJ50ULTRA Master and 1398 Procedures Guide ABT-1398-TSJ50WINtelligent LOGIC 5 Procedures Guide ABT-1785-TSJ52
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training164
Job Aid Catalog #
1336 FORCE Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1336T-TSJ201336 IMPACT Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1336E-TSJ201336 PLUS II Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1336F-TSJ201336 PLUS Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1336S-TSJ201336 PLUS Troubleshooting Guide - Dutch ABT-1336S-TSJ20NL1394 and GML Commander Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1394-TSJ211394 and GML CommanderTroubleshooting Guide - Portuguese ABT-1394-TSJ21PT1394 and GML Commander Troubleshooting Guide – Spanish ABT-1394-TSJ21ES1394 and GML Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1394-TSJ201397 Drives Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1397-TSJ20ControlLogix and RSLogix 5000 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1756-TSJ20ControlLogix and RSLogix 5000 Troubleshooting Guide - Portuguese ABT-1756-TSJ20PTControlNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide ABT-N200-TSJ20DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide ABT-N100-TSJ20DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Troubleshooting Guide - Portuguese ABT-N100-TSJ20PTDeviceNet and RSNetWorxTroubleshooting Guide – Spanish ABT-N100-TSJ20ESMini-PLC-2/02, PLC-2/16,PLC-2/17 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1772-VTA98Mini-PLC-2/05 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1772-VTA93
Job Aid Catalog #
Mini-PLC-2 and 2/15 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1772-VTA91PLC-2/20 and 2/30 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1772-VTA92PLC-3 and PLC-3/10 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1775-VTA91PLC-5 and 6200 Series Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1785-TSJ20PLC-5 and 6200 Series Troubleshooting Guide - Spanish ABT-1785-TSJ20ESPLC-5 and A.I. Series Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1785-TSJ21PLC-5 and A.I. Series Troubleshooting Guide - Spanish ABT-1785-TSJ21ESPLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1785-TSJ22PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide - Dutch ABT-1785-TSJ22NLPLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide - Portuguese ABT-1785-TSJ22PTPLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Troubleshooting Guide - Spanish ABT-1785-TSJ22ESPowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Troubleshooting Guide ABT-20B-TSJ20Series 8200 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-8000-VTA91SLC 500 and A.I. Series Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1747-TSJ21SLC 500 and A.I. Series Troubleshooting Guide - Spanish ABT-1747-TSJ21ESSLC 500 and APS Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1747-TSJ01SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Troubleshooting Guide ABT-1747-TSJ22SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Troubleshooting Guide – Dutch ABT-1747-TSJ22NLSLC 500 and RSLogix 500Troubleshooting Guide - Portuguese ABT-1747-TSJ22PTSLC 500 and RSLogix 500Troubleshooting Guide - Spanish ABT-1747-TSJ22ES
Troubleshooting Guides
Rockwell Automation troubleshooting guides contain flowcharts that walk you throughfaults that can occur on a system.These guides are specificallydesigned for use on the plant floorand their pocket-size design allows foreasy portability. Troubleshooting guidesare filled with procedures, error code information, and status indicator listings with recommended actions, reference charts,and hardware/software diagrams.
Features• Detailed illustrations with pertinent
troubleshooting information• Location indicators where action is needed or
where possible problems exist• Consistent starting point from which to logically
begin troubleshooting• Logical progression of questions, causes, and actions
to determine the problem• Important safety considerations, precautions
and general warnings
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 165
Job Aid Catalog #
1336 IMPACT Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1336E-DRG701336 PLUS and PLUS II Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1336SF-DRG701397 Drive Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1397-DRG708200 Lathe/Mill Reference Guide CD ABT-8000-TQR918600 MC/TC Asset Reference Guide CD ABT-8600-TQR928600 MC/TC Operators Reference Guide CD ABT-8600-TQR91ControlNet Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-N200-DRG70DeviceNet Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-N100-DRG70EtherNet/IP Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-N300-DRG70GuardLogix Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-GRDLX-DRG70GuardPLC Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1753-DRG70Logix5000 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1756-DRG70PLC-5 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1785-DRG70PowerFlex 700S Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-20D-DRG70PowerFlex 700S Phase II Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-20D-DRG71PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-20AB-DRG70SLC 500 Documentation Reference Guide CD ABT-1747-DRG70
Documentation Reference Guide CDs
Documentation reference guide CDs contain excerptsof the most frequently used product information fromseveral technical manuals. By consolidating technicalproduct content on one CD, users can search andfind important information faster.
Job Aid Catalog #
1336 Drive Quick Reference Card ABT-1336-TQR901336 FORCE Quick Reference Card ABT-1336T-TQR941336 IMPACT Quick Reference Guide ABT-1336E-TQR901336 PLUS and PLUS II Quick Reference Guide ABT-1336SF-TQR901336 PLUS Quick Reference Guide ABT-1336S-TQR931397 Drives Quick Reference Guide ABT-1397-TQR90CNC 9/Series Quick Reference Guide ABT-8520-TQR10IMC 120, 121, 123 Quick Reference Guide ABT-1771-TQR10IMC-S Quick Reference Guide ABT-4100-TQR10PowerFlex 700 Standard and Vector Control Quick Reference Guide ABT-20AB-TQR90Ultra 100 Series Parameter Quick Reference Guide ABT-1398-TQR90
Quick Reference Guides
Quick reference guides provide hardware and software specific information that users can quicklyreference when configuring Rockwell Automationequipment. Parameter-specific information can typically be found in a quick reference guide.
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training166
Improve Job Skills Through Self-StudyREFRESH
Self-Paced Learning
Do you find it difficult to schedule training for your staff? Are you trying to cut down on the additional expensesassociated with training?
Delivered via the Web or CD-ROM, we have the e-learning course for your needs. From basic industrial to Rockwell Automation specific content, the RSTrainer and Rockwell Automation University Online courses provide introductory and refresher training.
Courses are available in these areas:
• General Industrial• Automation Fundamentals• Controllers - ControlLogix, SLC, PLC• Motion• Visualization (Human Machine Interface)
To download a demo of computer-based training, go to:www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training/demo.html
Sign up now for a free 5-day trialof our web-based training at:www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training/webbased.html
Savings Program
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training168
Training Voucher Account
Maximize Your Training Budget
The award-winning Rockwell Automation training portfolio provides a wide-range of performance-basedproducts and services that can be purchased using your Training Voucher Account. As a programparticipant, you receive a Training Voucher Card with a pre-purchased quantity of vouchers in your account.The vouchers can be redeemed at any time within oneyear for a variety of Rockwell Automationtraining courses, products, and services.
BBeenneeffiittss::• A single purchase for all your
training needs• Savings up to 20% off your purchase• Monthly statements• Convenient web account tracking• Easy budgeting and purchasing• Redeemable for one year on any
Training offering
A Single Investment Redeemable For: Instructor-Led Training• Standard Courses - over 250 open-enrollment
classes from our schedule• Tailored Courses - combined lessons on job tasks
from over 1600 learning modules• Custom Courses - specifically designed to
meet your training needs• On-site Courses - private courses at your facility
or another convenient location• Virtual Classroom - instructor-led training
via your computer• Certification Program - curriculum to demonstrate
mastery of Rockwell Automation technologies• Test Services - knowledge-based assessments
before and after trainingSelf-Paced Training: e-learning• Computer-Based Training - RSTrainer Series• Web-Based Training - Rockwell Automation
University OnlineWorkstations
• Skill-building simulators for many Rockwell Automation technologies
Job Aids• Troubleshooting Guides• Procedure Guides• Quick Reference Guides• Documentation Reference Guide CDsIntegrated Performance Assessments• Assessment, gap analysis, reporting, and employee
development recommendations
Voucher Quantity Savings20-39 up to 14%40+ 20%
*Note: Special rules apply for volume discounted ePasses,sales promotions, previously discounted items, generalindustrial training, and custom/negotiated training.
To register for standard (open-enrollment) trainingcourses using vouchers, visit: www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
For more details about this program, call your localAllen-Bradley Distributor or Rockwell Automation Salesand Support office.
Certification Program
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training170
Certification Program
Technical proficiency and industry knowledge carryconsiderable influence. The Rockwell AutomationCertification Program is designed toproduce an exclusive base of proven system integration professionals whohave demonstrated exceptional technical competencies and expertise in the area of Rockwell Automation controls and networks.
The opportunity to become a CertifiedControls and Networks Professional isopen to all individuals utilizing Rockwell Automation controls and network technologies in their business.
Part I Part II Certification
Controls andNetworks Exam
Controls andNetworks Project
Certified Controlsand NetworksProfessional
USA-CR301 4 Hours USA-CR401 4 Hours
Certification Process
Rockwell Automation offers a two-part program to obtain certification.
Providing industry with a high quality certification program accepted by bothManufacturing Enterprises and Automation Solution Providers
To understand more about the Rockwell Automation Certification Program:Visit www.rockwellautomation.com/services/trainingCall 440-646-3434 (Option 4) or email [email protected]
Certification Preparation (Optional)
Controls andNetworks SystemLevel Integration
USA-CR201 4.5 Days
ControllersPre-Test
Assessment
NetworksPre-Test
Assessment
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 171
Part I - Knowledge Exam
The exam is comprised of technical knowledge-basedquestions covering system-level design,implementation, configuration, and troubleshootingtopics. The exam is delivered online and individualsmust successfully pass the exam with a score of 70%or higher in order to be eligible to proceed to thesecond part of the Certification program – the project.
Part II - Project
The project consists of a hands-on applicationwhereby individuals must demonstrate their technicalskills and abilities. Individuals will be faced with adesign and/or troubleshooting problem and beexpected to use their experience to solve it. This is apass/fail project and individuals may be required todesign, configure, troubleshoot, or program the necessary hardware to produce the end solution.
Certification Preparation
In order to help individuals prepare for theCertification exam, Rockwell Automation offers aControls and Networks System-Level Integrationcourse (USA-CR201). To attend this course,individuals must pass the free entry-level controlsand networks pre-tests with a score of 70% or higher.The pre-tests help you determine if you have anyknowledge gaps and offer recommendations for further product-level training.
Pre-tests are free and can be accessed at www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training.To enroll in the Certification Program, contact yourAllen-Bradley Distributor or local RockwellAutomation Sales and Support office.
USA-CR201
4.5 Days
Controls and Networks System-Level Integration
Course PurposeThis system-level course helps students prepare for the Controls and Networks exam (USA-CR301). This course focuses on integrating multiple technologies in a systems environment. This course also provides students with experience integrating various specialty modules used in the ControlLogix, PLC-5, and SLC 500 platforms.During class, students use proven techniques, advanced procedures, and best practices to optimize system performance. In addition, students take daily quizzes toevaluate their performance and understanding so that they can concentrate on areas that need improvement. The instructor assists students as they solidify their skillsand understanding.
Course ObjectivesAfter completing this course, students will be able to perform the following tasks:• Design a System• Install a System• Configure a System• Implement a System• Test and Troubleshoot a System
Prerequisites• Passing score on both the online Controller pre-test and Networks pre-test • Ability to write, interpret, and modify ladder logic for the SLC 500, PLC-5,
and ControlLogix platforms• Ability to design, install, configure, and troubleshoot DeviceNet, ControlNet,
and Ethernet/IP networks
Who Should AttendIndividuals responsible for the integration of a system, such as system integratorsand project engineers, should attend this course. This course will benefit individuals who want to fulfill the requirements for certification.
Difficulty Level Advanced System-Level
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training172
USA-CR401
4 HoursControls and Networks Project
Course PurposeThe Controls and Networks project is the final requirement for certification. Individuals are required to complete a hands-on project application to test their technicalknowledge and application of their controls and networks skills. The project is based on a functional specification. Individuals may be required to design, configure,troubleshoot, and/or program the necessary hardware to produce an end solution that meets specifications.
Course ObjectivesThe objective of the project is to determine whether individuals have masteredand demonstrated their skills to integrate ControlLogix, PLC-5, SLC 500,DeviceNet, ControlNet, and Ethernet equipment.
Prerequisites• Successful completion of the Controls and Networks Exam (USA-CR301)
Who Should AttendIndividuals who are interested in obtaining certification from Rockwell Automationand are responsible for system-level integration of Rockwell Automation controlsand network equipment.
Difficulty Level Advanced System-Level
Controls and Networks Exam
Course PurposeThis exam is designed to test the certification candidate's knowledge in two general areas of automation. The Controls section of the exam includes all Allen-Bradleyprocessors and processor families. The Networks section includes ControlNet, DeviceNet, and EtherNet network design, configuration, and troubleshooting.
Exam ObjectivesThe objective of the exam is to ensure that the certification candidate possessesthe requisite knowledge to design and troubleshoot at a system level. To be certified by Rockwell Automation, the candidate must have both knowledge andskill at the highest level.
PrerequisitesThere are no prerequisites for this exam; however it is highly encouraged that thecandidate has at least 3 to 5 years of automation industry experience and hasworked on 5 projects.
Who Should ParticipateIndividuals who are responsible for designing and integrating controller and network equipment within a system should consider the certification exam.
Exam Preparation• Controllers Assessment pre-test• Networks Assessment pre-testThese free assessments can help the candidate determine their product knowledge gaps and offer suggested areas for study. The assessments can befound at: www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Difficulty Level Advanced System-Level
USA-CR301
4 Hours
Assessment Services
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training174
Integrated Performance Assessment
Are you looking for proactive ways to improveproductivity in your plant?
Do you know what might be contributing toyour employees’ lack of performance?
Do you suspect your employees are contributing to downtime?
Do you want to determine the skill set of yourcurrent workforce for future training?
Not sure what training plan is best for youremployees?
The Integrated Performance Assessment offersyou the help and direction you need to create anaction plan.
When you schedule an assessment, a RockwellAutomation training analyst visits your facility to evaluate your employees’ skills and knowledge ofautomation and control equipment for specific jobsand tasks (maintenance, programming, etc.).Rockwell Automation provides you with supportinginformation and recommendations to improveemployee performance while remaining closelyaligned to your company’s business goals.
Deliverables
Rockwell Automation provides you with a writtenreport that offers these specific deliverables:• Detailed job task analysis• Skill gap identification• In-depth assessment of employee training needs• Customized curriculum map and course
descriptions• Training implementation recommendations• Training prioritization and rankings• Job performance support tools• ROI forecasts
Value Where It Counts
Rockwell Automation Integrated PerformanceAssessments can help boost plant productivity,positively impact plant metrics, and reduce totaltraining time and cost by focusing your humanresource investment where it counts – on specificemployee performance improvement and jobrequirements. It is the most systematic and comprehensive consulting service available in the industry.
Our process is simple:1.Your employees participate in one-on-one
interviews with the training analyst to discuss training needs.
2.Your employees complete a skills assessment related to their specific job tasks.
3.The Rockwell Automation training analyst interviews direct supervisors and managers to clarify and enhance data collected during the assessment.
4.Rockwell Automation submits a written report summarizing the findings and providing recommendations for training.
To start an Integrated Performance Assessment,contact your Allen-Bradley Distributor or localRockwell Automation Sales and Support office.
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 175
Allow us to demonstrate the value of our Training Solutions!
Free Service with On-Site Training
Rockwell Automation offers pre- and post-test assessmentswith all standard, on-site, training courses. Pre- and post-testsare value-added assessments used to measure students’knowledge at the beginning and end of training.
Measurable Value
Our pre- and post-test services provide youwith a measurable return on your traininginvestment by capturing data that quantifiesstudents’ knowledge increase as a result ofcompleting Rockwell Automation training.
Training Justification
If you are not certain your employees need aparticular course, allow Rockwell Automationto administer a pre-test assessment. The results can help youdetermine whether your employees will benefit from thetraining. Contact your Allen-Bradley Distributor or localRockwell Automation Sales and Support office to scheduleand coordinate the details.
Benefits
• Measures students’ knowledge• Provides quantitative training data • Offers students constructive feedback on technical
skills and knowledge at the beginning and end of class • Offers a benchmark against which to measure growth
and training value-add
Pre and Post-Test Assessments
To understand more about Training Assessment Services:Visit www.rockwellautomation.com/services/trainingCall 440-646-3434 (Option 4) or email [email protected]
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training176
Not sure if a course is right for you?
The Rockwell Automation Course Selection Toolhelps you answer this question and make confidentdecisions about enrolling in Rockwell Automationtraining courses.
The Course Selection Tool offers you FREE! shortcourse assessments used to measure your knowledgeof technical topics covered in Rockwell Automationtraining courses. Results from the assessments helpyou determine whether you should enroll in a courseor consider enrolling in another course that will better meet your skill and knowledge needs.All course assessments are FREE! and results are kept confidential.
If you are looking for justification or confirmationthat Rockwell Automation training is for you, then the Course Selection Tool is an invaluable resource.Access the Course Selection Tool at:
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
Assessments are available for courses in these technologies:• Communications• Condition Monitoring• Drives• Programmable Controllers• Visualization
Course Selection Tool
Enrollment and Registration
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training178
Enrollment and Registration
U.S.
AtlantaBostonCharlotteChicagoCincinnatiClevelandDallasDavenportDenverDetroitHoustonIndianapolisKalamazoo
Canada
BramptonCambridgeEdmontonLachine
Training and Materials
Printed materials provided in Rockwell Automationtraining courses are copyrighted and may not bereproduced. No audio or visual recording of RockwellAutomation training courses, or Rockwell Automationpersonnel teaching such courses, may be taken orreproduced electronically.
Rockwell Automation Training Offices
Rockwell Automation training is conducted in several cities across the country and in Canada.Call 444400--664466--33443344 ((OOppttiioonn 44) to be routed to the near-est Rockwell Automation training coordinator in oneof these locations:
How to Enroll
Enrolling is easy! Choose one of these methods:
• View the Rockwell Automation scheduled courses then download and complete the online training registration request form located on the Training Services website: www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training
• Contact your authorized Allen-Bradley Distributor or local Rockwell Automation Sales and Support office.
• Call a Rockwell Automation Training Coordinator at 444400--664466--33443344 ((OOppttiioonn 44).
• Fax a training registration form to your local authorized Allen-Bradley Distributor or Rockwell Automation Training Coordinator.
• E-mail training inquiries to: [email protected]
Class size is limited to maximize individual attention.Register early, since Rockwell Automation training classesfrequently fill to capacity.
For registration assistance, contact your authorized Allen-Bradley Distributor or local Rockwell AutomationSales and Support office. Or, call 444400--664466--33443344 ((OOppttiioonn 44)to be routed to the nearest Rockwell Automation Training Coordinator.
Training Schedules and Pricing
Refer to the Training Services website for current schedules and course tuition.
wwwwww..rroocckkwweellllaauuttoommaattiioonn..ccoomm//sseerrvviicceess//ttrraaiinniinngg
Cancellation PolicyCancellation of registration for a Rockwell Automationcourse less than 14 days prior to the start date is subject toa cancellation fee of 50% of the tuition. If a student fails toappear for a scheduled course, full tuition will be charged.
Rockwell Automation strongly suggests that students onlymake refundable travel and lodging arrangements.Rockwell Automation reserves the right to alter courseschedules, content, limit class size, reschedule, discontinue,or cancel courses.
Little RockLos AngelesMilwaukeeMinneapolisNashvilleNew York CityPhiladelphiaRichmondRochesterSan FranciscoSeattleSt. LouisTampa
Technical Training Registration Form
Payment Option (Circle One): Payment Reference Number: Date:Purchase Order | Check | Voucher Account (corresponds to the Payment Option selected)First Name: Last Name: Middle Initial:Title/Position:Company:Company Address:City: State/Province: Zip Code:Telephone Number: Fax Number: E-Mail Address:
(Please complete, if other than course attendee)
Contact Name: Telephone Number: Fax Number:
Course Code Course Title Course Date Course Location/City
Terms and Conditions For Rockwell Automation Training Services:• Payment must be secured by one of the above methods before enrollment can be confirmed.• If paying by purchase order, credit card, or check, please register through your local A-B distributor.• Registration cancellation less than 14 days prior to the course start date is subject to a fee equal to 50% of the course tuition.• Rockwell Automation strongly suggests that you only make “refundable” travel & lodging arrangements.• Rockwell Automation reserves the right to alter course schedules, content, limit class size, reschedule, discontinue, or cancel courses.
E-mail or fax this form to your local authorized distributor to register. Call (440) 646-3434 (option 4) or email [email protected] with questions.
Distributor’s Purchase Order Number: Contact Name:Distributor Name & Address:
Distributor Telephone Number: Distributor Fax Number:Distributor Passport ID Number: Customer Passport ID Number:
Customer Information print clearly!
Course Information
Distributor Information For Distributor Use Only
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training180
Index
Title Number Page
1336 FORCE Design and Startup CCA134 104
1336 FORCE Maintenance and Troubleshooting CCA124 104
1336 IMPACT Communications CCA135 74
1336 IMPACT Programming CCA138 74
1336 IMPACT Startup CCA133 73
1336 IMPACT Troubleshooting CCA132 71
1336 PLUS II Maintenance and Troubleshooting CCA137 72
1336 PLUS Maintenance and Troubleshooting CCA129 71
1394 and GML Commander Maintenance and Troubleshooting CCN183 61
1394 and GML Commander Programming CCN184 63
1395 Drive Maintenance and Troubleshooting CDD131 69
1397 Drive Maintenance and Troubleshooting CDD132 69
2005 National Electrical Code and Grounding and Bonding NTT-PEC5G 111
2005 National Electrical Code Changes NTT-PNU 112
2030 ElectroGuard Safety Isolation SystemAuthorized Maintenance and Troubleshooting SAF-ELE102-LD 34
2030 ElectroGuard Safety Isolation SystemMaintenance and Troubleshooting Fundamentals SAF-ELE101-LD 33
AC/DC Motors and Drives Fundamentals CCA101 68
Advanced Fiber Optic Training NTT-PAF 119
Air Conditioning and Refrigeration NTT-PAC5 115
Air Conditioning and Refrigerationwith Principles of Heation Applications NTT-PHV5A 116
AutoMax AC Drive Distributed Power System RE0526 104
AutoMax Advanced Programming RE0525 104
AutoMax DC Drive Distributed Power System RE0521 104
AutoMax DC Drive Four Card Drive Group RE0522 104
AutoMax Intermediate Programming RE0528 104
Courses
AutoMax Maintenance and Troubleshooting RE0520 70
AutoMax Programming Fundamentals RE0523 76
Basics of Industrial Electricity NTT-PEY 113
Basic Process Control Using Smart Instrumentation CCPC01 40, 82
Boilers: A Technical and Operational Workshop NTT-PBO 114
Centrifugal Pumps NTT-PPTH 118
Chillers: Operation and Maintenance of Chilled Water Systems NTT-PCW 116
CNC 9/Series Maintenance CNN162 62
CNC 9/Series Programming CNN161 64
Confined Space Entry NTT-PCS 110
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Design and Configuration CCP170 43
ControlNet and RSNetWorx Maintenance and Troubleshooting CCP172 41
Controls and Networks Exam USA-CR301 172
Controls and Networks Project USA-CR401 172
Controls and Networks System Level Integration USA-CR201 171
Data Highway/Ethernet Peer-to-Peer Communications CCP310-LD 44
Datapac Applications EK-ICM161 94
DC Drives and AutoMax/DCS Introduction RE0505 68
DeviceNet and RSNetWorx Configuration and Troubleshooting CCP164 42
Distributed Power System - SA3100 and RGU/NRU RE0530 104
Dynamic Balancing EK-ICM121 92
A D
B
C
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 181
Electrical Safety for Electric Power Generation,Transmission, and Distribution NTT-PHS 108
Electro-pneumatics Training NTT-PPNE 118
Emonitor Advanced EK-ICM221 94
Emonitor Basic EK-ICM141 93
Enpac Applications EK-ICM162 95
EtherNet/IP Design and Configuration CCP174 43
Ethernet/IP Maintenance and Troubleshooting CCP176 42
FactoryTalk Batch Maintenance and Troubleshooting (formerly RSBizWare Batch) RS-BAMTRG 82
FactoryTalk Batch Phase Design (formerly RSBizWare Batch) RS-ABATRG 84
FactoryTalk Batch Server and Configuration Tools (formerly RSBizWare Batch) RS-BATRG 85
FactoryTalk Historian/Metrics RS-BIZ001 100
FactoryTalk Integrator RS-RSQLTRG 101
FactoryTalk View ME and PanalView Plus Conversion (formerly RSView ME) CCV202 54
FactoryTalk View ME and PanelView Plus Programming (formerly RSView ME) CCV204 54
FactoryTalk View SE Architecture (formerly RSView SE) CCV205-LD 53
FactoryTalk View SE Maintenance and Troubleshooting (formerly RSView SE) CCV206-LD 51
FactoryTalk View SE Programming (formerly RSView SE) RS-RSVSE 52
Fiber Optic Training NTT-PFB 119
FlexPak 3000 AutoMax Communications RE0119 104
FlexPak 3000 Digital DC Drive RE0118 104
FOUNDATION Fieldbus Basics CCPC02-LD 83
Grounding and Bonding of Electrical Systems NTT-PGR 112
GuardLogix Application Development SAF-LOG101 35
GuardLogix Maintenance and Troubleshooting SAF-LOG102 33
GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller SystemsFundamentals SAF-PLC101 32
GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems Maintenance and Troubleshooting SAF-PLC102 34
GuardPLC 1600/1800 Controller Systems Programming SAF-PLC103 36
GV3000 and AutoMax Communications RE0212 104
GV3000 Vector Control AC Drive RE0211 104
Hydraulics and System Troubleshooting NTT-PHY4T 117
Hydraulics Training NTT-PHY4 117
Industrial Electrical (Web only) WBT1PACK 142
Industrial Hydraulics (Web only) WBT1PACK 143
Industrial Mechanical (Web only) WBT1PACK 142
Industrial Pneumatics (Web only) WBT1PACK 143
IntelliCENTER CCI105-LD 77
Introduction to Automation and Integrated Architecture CIA101 8, 40, 50, 60
Introduction to Instrumentation and Process Control NTT-PIA 114
Introduction to the 2005 National Electrical Code NTT-PEC 111
Kinetix 6000 Maintenance and Troubleshooting CCN200 10, 61
Mechanical Drives/Power Transmission NTT-PMD 120
Microsoft SQL Server for FactoryTalk Introduction (formerly RSBizWare) RS-MSSQLB 99
H
I
K
M
E
F
G
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training182
Index
Courses - continued
Title Number Page
Microsoft VBA with Rockwell Software and Microsoft Office RS-RSVBA 99
Mobile Electrical (Web only) WBT1PACK 144
Mobile Hydraulics (Web only) WBT1PACK 144
Motion Control Fundamentals CCN130 60
National Fire Alarm Code (NFPA 72) with NICET I / II NTT-PFA5N 110
NFPA 70E/Arc Flash Electrical Safety NTT-PES 107
NFPA 70E/Arc Flash Electrical Safety with3rd-Day Arc Flash Calculation Workshop NTT-PE3S 107
NFPA 70E/Arc Flash Electrical Safety withElectrical Safety for Electric Power Generation,Transmission, and Distribution NTT-PE3H 108
OSHA 10-Hour Training NTT-POH 109
OSHA 30-Hour Training NTT-POS 109
PanelView 300/550/600/900/1000/1400 and PanelBuilder32 Application Development CCP196 51
PanelView 1000e/1200e/1400e and PanelBuilder 1400e Application Development CCP198 53
PID Loop Basics CCP708-LD 83
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Advanced Maintenanceand Troubleshooting CCP409 19
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Advanced Programming CCP411 20
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Maintenance and Troubleshooting CCP412 18
PLC-5 and RSLogix 5 Programming CCP410 19
PLC-5 to ControlLogix Transitioning CCP710 9, 20
PLC-5/SLC 500 and RSLogix Fundamentals CCP122 18, 26
PLC Fundamentals (Web only) WBT1PACK 136
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communicationson ControlNet CCA164 45, 75
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Communicationson DeviceNet CCA162 44, 76
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Configuration and Startup CCA161 75
PowerFlex 700 Vector Control Maintenance and Troubleshooting CCA163 72
PowerFlex 700S Phase I Maintenance and Troubleshooting PFX700S-LD 73
PowerFlex 700S Phase II Maintenanceand Troubleshooting PFX700S2-LD 70
Principles of Heating Application NTT-P5H 115
RSCompanion for SLC 500 and MicroLogix Processors 9393-RSCOMP500 130
RSEnterprise Controls Project Implementation RS-ECPD01-LD 100
RSLogix 5000 Level 1: ControlLogix System Fundamentals CCP146 8, 32
RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Interpretation CCCL21 9
RSLogix 5000 Level 2: Basic Ladder Logic Programming CCP151 11
RSLogix 5000 Level 3: ControlLogix Maintenance and Troubleshooting CCP153 10
RSLogix 5000 Level 3: Project Development CCP143 11, 35
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Function Block Programming CCP152 13, 84
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Motion ProgrammingUsing Ladder Logic CCN142 12, 63
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: PhaseManager Project Design CCP711 12, 85
RSLogix 5000 Level 4: Structured Text/Sequential Function Chart Programming CCP154-LD 13
R
N
O
P
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 183
S
T
U
V
W
X
RSLogix 5000 Level 5: Advanced Motion Programming CCN190-LD 14, 64
RSMACC Installation and Configuration RS-RSMACC 101
RSTestStand Enterprise Project Development RS-RSTS101-LD 102
RSTrainer for ControlLogix Fundamentals 9393-RSTCLX 125
RSTrainer for Fundamentals of AC/DC Motors and Drives (CBT and Web) 9393-RSTACD 131, 136
RSTrainer for Hydraulics (CBT and Web) 9393-RSTHYD 131, 143
RSTrainer for RSLinx Software 9393-RSTLINX 132
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5 Software 9393-RSTLX5 128
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software -Documenting and Searching (CBT and Web) 9393-RST500DSENE 130, 139
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software - Offline Programming (CBT and Web) 9393-RST500OFENE 129, 138
RSTrainer for RSLogix 500 Software - Online Monitoring (CBT and Web) 9393-RST500ONENE 129, 139
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software - Motion (CBT and Web) 9393-RSTLX5KMOT 127, 141
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software Offline Programming (CBT and Web) 9393-RSTLX5KOFF 126, 140
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software - Online Monitoring (CBT and Web) 9393-RSTLX5KON 127, 141
RSTrainer for RSLogix 5000 Software Project Configuration (CBT and Web) 9393-RSTLX5KPRJ 126, 140
RSTrainer for RSView ME Software - Applications and Displays (CBT and Web) 9393-RSTVMEPT1 124, 137
RSTrainer for RSView ME Software - Drawing Objects (CBT and Web) 9393-RSTVMEPT2 124, 137
RSTrainer for RSView ME Software - Interactive Objects (CBT and Web) 9393-RSTVMEPT3 125, 138
RSTrainer for SLC 500 Fundamentals 9393-RSTSLC 128
RSTrainer Student Manager 9393-RSTSMGRENF 132
RSView32 Project Development RS-RSVTRG 52
RSView32 Project Maintenance CCP200 50
RSView ME Tips and Techniques IVCRSV0001 55
SIGMA Universal Process Monitor (UOI) Interface RE0527 104
SLC 500 and PLC-5 Communications CCPS65 21, 26, 41
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Advanced Maintenance and Troubleshooting CCPS45 27
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Advanced Programming CCPS42 28
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Maintenance and Troubleshooting CCPS43 27
SLC 500 and RSLogix 500 Programming CCPS41 28
Time Waveform Analysis EK-ICM281 92
Troubleshooting Electrical Control Circuits NTT-PMC 113
Ultra3000 Programming CCN191-LD 62
Vibration Analysis Fundamentals EK-ICM101 90
Vibration Analysis: Level I EK-ICM201 90
Vibration Analysis: Level II EK-ICM261 91
Vibration Analysis: Level III EK-ICM301 91
Welding: Principles, Practices, and Procedures NTT-PWT 120
XM System Fundamentals EK-ICM165 93
www.rockwellautomation.com/services/training184
Index
Products/Services
Title Number Page
Certification Program – 169
Course Selection Tool – 176
Integrated Performance Assessment – 174
Job Aids – 161
Pre- and Post-Test Assessments – 175
Training Voucher Account – 168
Workstations
Workstation Number Page
1336 FORCE AC Drive Workstation ABT-TD1336T 148
1336 IMPACT AC Drive Workstation ABT-TD1336E 148
1336 PLUS II AC Drive Workstartion ABT-TD1336F 149
1746 I/O Rack System Workstation ABT-TDSLC1 (120V AC) 152
1746 I/O Rack System Workstation ABT-TDSLC2 (220V AC) 152
1771 I/O Rack System Workstation ABT-TDPLC1 (120V AC) 152
1771 I/O Rack System Workstation ABT-TDPLC2 (220V AC) 152
Advanced Communications Workstation ABT-TDCLXCOM 153
ControlLogix Motion Workstation ABT-TDCLX1 155
ControlLogix Workstation - No Motion ABT-TDCLX2 155(7-Slot chassis)
ControlLogix Motion Workstation ABT-TDCLX1NP 156- No Controller
ControlLogix Workstation - No Motion ABT-TDCLX3 156(10-Slot chassis)
ControlNet Workstation ABT-TDCNET1 153
DeviceNet Workstation ABT-TDDNET1 154
EtherNet/IP Workstation ABT-TDENETIP 154
Fan Demo Unit ABT-TDPF700FAN 151
GuardLogix Controller Workstation ABT-TDGRDLX1 157
GuardPLC Workstation ABT-TDGRDPLC1 157
Integrated Architecture Workstation ABT-TDIA 159
Kinetix 6000 Servo Drive Workstation ABT-TD20941(120V AC) 149
PanelView 1000 Workstation ABT-TDPV1000TC01 158
PanelView 600 Workstation ABT-TDPV600TC01 158
PanelView Plus Workstation ABT-TDPVPLUSTC01 159
PowerFlex 700 Workstation ABT-TDPF700 150
Smart Instrumentation Workstation ABT-TDSMART 150
Ultra 3000 Servo Drive Workstation ABT-TD20981 (120V AC) 151
Universal I/O Simulator Workstation ABT-TDUI01 (120V AC) 160
Universal I/O Simulator Workstation ABT-TDUI02 (240V AC) 160
XM Workstation ABT-TDXM-VIB 160
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. 185
The global Rockwell Automation Services and Support network includes over 1000 field support engineers,phone support specialists, asset management professionals, training instructors and repair technicians.Our broad network of automation specialists utilize the global resources of Rockwell Automation to provide local, award-winning services and support for your automation equipment.
Phone Support1, Repair Parts, Instructor-Led Training Registration and On-Site Support Callout ServicesU.S./Canada 1-440-646-3434
Canada (callout services only)- Weekdays 8am-5pm local time Call local Rockwell Automation Sales Office2
- Weekends, holidays,weekdays 5pm-8am local time 1-800-422-4913
Outside U.S./Canada Call local Rockwell Automation Sales Office2
1 TechConnect Support may be required. If you have purchased TechConnect Support,please consult your users guide for additional information on using this feature.
2 Go to www.rockwellautomation.com/locations and select your country for local contact information.Locations are subject to change without notice.
Get Support Now
Publication GMST10-CA001B-EN-P August 2006
1336 FORCE, 1336 IMPACT, 1336 PLUS, 1336 PLUS II, CNC, CompactBlock I/O, CompactLogix, ControlLogix, Data Highway Plus, Datapac, DH+, DriveExecutive,DriveExplorer, DriveLogix, DriveTools, ElectroGuard, Emonitor, Enpac, FactoryTalk, FlexLogix, GML, GuardLogix, GuardPLC, Kinetix, Logix5000, PanelBuilder, PanelView,PhaseManager, PLC, PLC-5, PowerFlex, RSBizWare, RSLinx, RSLogix 5, RSLogix 500, RSLogix 5000, RSMACC, RSNetWorx, RSView, SCANport, SIGMA, SLC, SoftLogix, Ultra,VersaView, and XM are trademarks or registered trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.ControlNet is a trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd.DeviceNet is a trademark of the Open DeviceNet Vendor Association.HART is a registered trademark of the HART Communication Foundation.Foundation Fieldbus is a trademark of Fieldbus Foundation. Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
© 2006 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved.